diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
161 files changed, 5080 insertions, 821 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/removed/o2cb b/Documentation/ABI/removed/o2cb index 7f5daa465093..20c91adca6d4 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/removed/o2cb +++ b/Documentation/ABI/removed/o2cb @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ What: /sys/o2cb symlink Date: May 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com Description: This is a symlink: /sys/o2cb to /sys/fs/o2cb. The symlink is removed when new versions of ocfs2-tools which know to look diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/removed/raw1394 b/Documentation/ABI/removed/raw1394 index 490aa1efc4ae..ec333e676322 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/removed/raw1394 +++ b/Documentation/ABI/removed/raw1394 @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ Description: /dev/raw1394 was a character device file that allowed low-level access to FireWire buses. Its major drawbacks were its inability to implement sensible device security policies, and its low level - of abstraction that required userspace clients do duplicate much + of abstraction that required userspace clients to duplicate much of the kernel's ieee1394 core functionality. Replaced by /dev/fw*, i.e. the <linux/firewire-cdev.h> ABI of firewire-core. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-ideapad b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-ideapad new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7079c0b21030 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-ideapad @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +What: /sys/kernel/debug/ideapad/cfg +Date: Sep 2011 +KernelVersion: 3.2 +Contact: Ike Panhc <ike.pan@canonical.com> +Description: + +cfg shows the return value of _CFG method in VPC2004 device. It tells machine +capability and what graphic component within the machine. + + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/ideapad/status +Date: Sep 2011 +KernelVersion: 3.2 +Contact: Ike Panhc <ike.pan@canonical.com> +Description: + +status shows infos we can read and tells its meaning and value. + + diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/evm b/Documentation/ABI/testing/evm new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8374d4557e5d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/evm @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +What: security/evm +Date: March 2011 +Contact: Mimi Zohar <zohar@us.ibm.com> +Description: + EVM protects a file's security extended attributes(xattrs) + against integrity attacks. The initial method maintains an + HMAC-sha1 value across the extended attributes, storing the + value as the extended attribute 'security.evm'. + + EVM depends on the Kernel Key Retention System to provide it + with a trusted/encrypted key for the HMAC-sha1 operation. + The key is loaded onto the root's keyring using keyctl. Until + EVM receives notification that the key has been successfully + loaded onto the keyring (echo 1 > <securityfs>/evm), EVM + can not create or validate the 'security.evm' xattr, but + returns INTEGRITY_UNKNOWN. Loading the key and signaling EVM + should be done as early as possible. Normally this is done + in the initramfs, which has already been measured as part + of the trusted boot. For more information on creating and + loading existing trusted/encrypted keys, refer to: + Documentation/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt. (A sample dracut + patch, which loads the trusted/encrypted key and enables + EVM, is available from http://linux-ima.sourceforge.net/#EVM.) diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block index c1eb41cb9876..2b5d56127fce 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block @@ -206,3 +206,16 @@ Description: when a discarded area is read the discard_zeroes_data parameter will be set to one. Otherwise it will be 0 and the result of reading a discarded area is undefined. +What: /sys/block/<disk>/alias +Date: Aug 2011 +Contact: Nao Nishijima <nao.nishijima.xt@hitachi.com> +Description: + A raw device name of a disk does not always point a same disk + each boot-up time. Therefore, users have to use persistent + device names, which udev creates when the kernel finds a disk, + instead of raw device name. However, kernel doesn't show those + persistent names on its messages (e.g. dmesg). + This file can store an alias of the disk and it would be + appeared in kernel messages if it is set. A disk can have an + alias which length is up to 255bytes. Users can use alphabets, + numbers, "-" and "_" in alias name. This file is writeonce. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-bcma b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-bcma index 06b62badddd1..721b4aea3020 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-bcma +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-bcma @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ What: /sys/bus/bcma/devices/.../manuf Date: May 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: RafaÅ‚ MiÅ‚ecki <zajec5@gmail.com> Description: Each BCMA core has it's manufacturer id. See @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/bus/bcma/devices/.../id Date: May 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: RafaÅ‚ MiÅ‚ecki <zajec5@gmail.com> Description: There are a few types of BCMA cores, they can be identified by @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/bus/bcma/devices/.../rev Date: May 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: RafaÅ‚ MiÅ‚ecki <zajec5@gmail.com> Description: BCMA cores of the same type can still slightly differ depending @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/bus/bcma/devices/.../class Date: May 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: RafaÅ‚ MiÅ‚ecki <zajec5@gmail.com> Description: Each BCMA core is identified by few fields, including class it diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-drivers-ehci_hcd b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-drivers-ehci_hcd new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..60c60fa624b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-drivers-ehci_hcd @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +What: /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ehci_hcd/.../companion + /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbN/../companion +Date: January 2007 +KernelVersion: 2.6.21 +Contact: Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu> +Description: + PCI-based EHCI USB controllers (i.e., high-speed USB-2.0 + controllers) are often implemented along with a set of + "companion" full/low-speed USB-1.1 controllers. When a + high-speed device is plugged in, the connection is routed + to the EHCI controller; when a full- or low-speed device + is plugged in, the connection is routed to the companion + controller. + + Sometimes you want to force a high-speed device to connect + at full speed, which can be accomplished by forcing the + connection to be routed to the companion controller. + That's what this file does. Writing a port number to the + file causes connections on that port to be routed to the + companion controller, and writing the negative of a port + number returns the port to normal operation. + + For example: To force the high-speed device attached to + port 4 on bus 2 to run at full speed: + + echo 4 >/sys/bus/usb/devices/usb2/../companion + + To return the port to high-speed operation: + + echo -4 >/sys/bus/usb/devices/usb2/../companion + + Reading the file gives the list of ports currently forced + to the companion controller. + + Note: Some EHCI controllers do not have companions; they + may contain an internal "transaction translator" or they + may be attached directly to a "rate-matching hub". This + mechanism will not work with such controllers. Also, it + cannot be used to force a port on a high-speed hub to + connect at full speed. + + Note: When this file was first added, it appeared in a + different sysfs directory. The location given above is + correct for 2.6.35 (and probably several earlier kernel + versions as well). + diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb index 294aa864a60a..e647378e9e88 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb @@ -142,3 +142,18 @@ Description: such devices. Users: usb_modeswitch + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/usb2_hardware_lpm +Date: September 2011 +Contact: Andiry Xu <andiry.xu@amd.com> +Description: + If CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND is set and a USB 2.0 lpm-capable device + is plugged in to a xHCI host which support link PM, it will + perform a LPM test; if the test is passed and host supports + USB2 hardware LPM (xHCI 1.0 feature), USB2 hardware LPM will + be enabled for the device and the USB device directory will + contain a file named power/usb2_hardware_lpm. The file holds + a string value (enable or disable) indicating whether or not + USB2 hardware LPM is enabled for the device. Developer can + write y/Y/1 or n/N/0 to the file to enable/disable the + feature. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-backlight-driver-adp8870 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-backlight-driver-adp8870 index aa11dbdd794b..4a9c545bda4b 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-backlight-driver-adp8870 +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-backlight-driver-adp8870 @@ -4,8 +4,8 @@ What: /sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/l2_bright_max What: /sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/l3_office_max What: /sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/l4_indoor_max What: /sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/l5_dark_max -Date: Mai 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: device-drivers-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org Description: Control the maximum brightness for <ambient light zone> @@ -18,8 +18,8 @@ What: /sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/l2_bright_dim What: /sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/l3_office_dim What: /sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/l4_indoor_dim What: /sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/l5_dark_dim -Date: Mai 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: device-drivers-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org Description: Control the dim brightness for <ambient light zone> @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@ Description: this <ambient light zone>. What: /sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/ambient_light_level -Date: Mai 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: device-drivers-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org Description: Get conversion value of the light sensor. @@ -39,8 +39,8 @@ Description: 8000 (max ambient brightness) What: /sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/ambient_light_zone -Date: Mai 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: device-drivers-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org Description: Get/Set current ambient light zone. Reading returns diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..23d78b5aab11 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +What: /sys/class/devfreq/.../ +Date: September 2011 +Contact: MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com> +Description: + Provide a place in sysfs for the devfreq objects. + This allows accessing various devfreq specific variables. + The name of devfreq object denoted as ... is same as the + name of device using devfreq. + +What: /sys/class/devfreq/.../governor +Date: September 2011 +Contact: MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com> +Description: + The /sys/class/devfreq/.../governor shows the name of the + governor used by the corresponding devfreq object. + +What: /sys/class/devfreq/.../cur_freq +Date: September 2011 +Contact: MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com> +Description: + The /sys/class/devfreq/.../cur_freq shows the current + frequency of the corresponding devfreq object. + +What: /sys/class/devfreq/.../central_polling +Date: September 2011 +Contact: MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com> +Description: + The /sys/class/devfreq/.../central_polling shows whether + the devfreq ojbect is using devfreq-provided central + polling mechanism or not. + +What: /sys/class/devfreq/.../polling_interval +Date: September 2011 +Contact: MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com> +Description: + The /sys/class/devfreq/.../polling_interval shows and sets + the requested polling interval of the corresponding devfreq + object. The values are represented in ms. If the value is + less than 1 jiffy, it is considered to be 0, which means + no polling. This value is meaningless if the governor is + not polling; thus. If the governor is not using + devfreq-provided central polling + (/sys/class/devfreq/.../central_polling is 0), this value + may be useless. + +What: /sys/class/devfreq/.../userspace/set_freq +Date: September 2011 +Contact: MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com> +Description: + The /sys/class/devfreq/.../userspace/set_freq shows and + sets the requested frequency for the devfreq object if + userspace governor is in effect. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh index 748fe1701d25..b02001488eef 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh @@ -22,6 +22,14 @@ Description: mesh will be fragmented or silently discarded if the packet size exceeds the outgoing interface MTU. +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/ap_isolation +Date: May 2011 +Contact: Antonio Quartulli <ordex@autistici.org> +Description: + Indicates whether the data traffic going from a + wireless client to another wireless client will be + silently dropped. + What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_bandwidth Date: October 2010 Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-logitech-lg4ff b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-logitech-lg4ff new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9aec8ef228b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-logitech-lg4ff @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +What: /sys/module/hid_logitech/drivers/hid:logitech/<dev>/range. +Date: July 2011 +KernelVersion: 3.2 +Contact: Michal Malý <madcatxster@gmail.com> +Description: Display minimum, maximum and current range of the steering + wheel. Writing a value within min and max boundaries sets the + range of the wheel. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-wacom b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-wacom new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..82d4df136444 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-wacom @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +What: /sys/class/hidraw/hidraw*/device/speed +Date: April 2010 +Kernel Version: 2.6.35 +Contact: linux-bluetooth@vger.kernel.org +Description: + The /sys/class/hidraw/hidraw*/device/speed file controls + reporting speed of Wacom bluetooth tablet. Reading from + this file returns 1 if tablet reports in high speed mode + or 0 otherwise. Writing to this file one of these values + switches reporting speed. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<cfg>.<intf>/wacom_led/led +Date: August 2011 +Contact: linux-input@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Attribute group for control of the status LEDs and the OLEDs. + This attribute group is only available for Intuos 4 M, L, + and XL (with LEDs and OLEDs) and Cintiq 21UX2 (LEDs only). + Therefore its presence implicitly signifies the presence of + said LEDs and OLEDs on the tablet device. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<cfg>.<intf>/wacom_led/status0_luminance +Date: August 2011 +Contact: linux-input@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Writing to this file sets the status LED luminance (1..127) + when the stylus does not touch the tablet surface, and no + button is pressed on the stylus. This luminance level is + normally lower than the level when a button is pressed. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<cfg>.<intf>/wacom_led/status1_luminance +Date: August 2011 +Contact: linux-input@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Writing to this file sets the status LED luminance (1..127) + when the stylus touches the tablet surface, or any button is + pressed on the stylus. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<cfg>.<intf>/wacom_led/status_led0_select +Date: August 2011 +Contact: linux-input@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Writing to this file sets which one of the four (for Intuos 4) + or of the right four (for Cintiq 21UX2) status LEDs is active (0..3). + The other three LEDs on the same side are always inactive. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<cfg>.<intf>/wacom_led/status_led1_select +Date: September 2011 +Contact: linux-input@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Writing to this file sets which one of the left four (for Cintiq 21UX2) + status LEDs is active (0..3). The other three LEDs on the left are always + inactive. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<cfg>.<intf>/wacom_led/buttons_luminance +Date: August 2011 +Contact: linux-input@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Writing to this file sets the overall luminance level (0..15) + of all eight button OLED displays. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<cfg>.<intf>/wacom_led/button<n>_rawimg +Date: August 2011 +Contact: linux-input@vger.kernel.org +Description: + When writing a 1024 byte raw image in Wacom Intuos 4 + interleaving format to the file, the image shows up on Button N + of the device. The image is a 64x32 pixel 4-bit gray image. The + 1024 byte binary is split up into 16x 64 byte chunks. Each 64 + byte chunk encodes the image data for two consecutive lines on + the display. The low nibble of each byte contains the first + line, and the high nibble contains the second line. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop index ff53183c3848..814b01354c41 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop @@ -5,19 +5,4 @@ Contact: "Ike Panhc <ike.pan@canonical.com>" Description: Control the power of camera module. 1 means on, 0 means off. -What: /sys/devices/platform/ideapad/cfg -Date: Jun 2011 -KernelVersion: 3.1 -Contact: "Ike Panhc <ike.pan@canonical.com>" -Description: - Ideapad capability bits. - Bit 8-10: 1 - Intel graphic only - 2 - ATI graphic only - 3 - Nvidia graphic only - 4 - Intel and ATI graphic - 5 - Intel and Nvidia graphic - Bit 16: Bluetooth exist (1 for exist) - Bit 17: 3G exist (1 for exist) - Bit 18: Wifi exist (1 for exist) - Bit 19: Camera exist (1 for exist) diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-wacom b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-wacom deleted file mode 100644 index 1517976e25c4..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-wacom +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10 +0,0 @@ -What: /sys/class/hidraw/hidraw*/device/speed -Date: April 2010 -Kernel Version: 2.6.35 -Contact: linux-bluetooth@vger.kernel.org -Description: - The /sys/class/hidraw/hidraw*/device/speed file controls - reporting speed of wacom bluetooth tablet. Reading from - this file returns 1 if tablet reports in high speed mode - or 0 otherwise. Writing to this file one of these values - switches reporting speed. diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl index 445289cd0e65..2014155c899d 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl @@ -433,8 +433,18 @@ Insert notes about VLAN interfaces with hw crypto here or in the hw crypto chapter. </para> + <section id="ps-client"> + <title>support for powersaving clients</title> +!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h AP support for powersaving clients + </section> !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_buffered_bc !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_beacon_get +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_eosp_irqsafe +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_frame_release_type +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_ps_transition +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_set_buffered +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_block_awake </chapter> <chapter id="multi-iface"> @@ -460,7 +470,6 @@ !Finclude/net/mac80211.h sta_notify_cmd !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_find_sta !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_block_awake </chapter> <chapter id="hardware-scan-offload"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml index 207e1a5bf8f0..3bc8a61efe30 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml @@ -352,6 +352,7 @@ typedef enum fe_delivery_system { SYS_CMMB, SYS_DAB, SYS_DVBT2, + SYS_TURBO, } fe_delivery_system_t; </programlisting> </section> @@ -809,6 +810,8 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy { <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INVERSION"><constant>DTV_INVERSION</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-SYMBOL-RATE"><constant>DTV_SYMBOL_RATE</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INNER-FEC"><constant>DTV_INNER_FEC</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-VOLTAGE"><constant>DTV_VOLTAGE</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-TONE"><constant>DTV_TONE</constant></link></para></listitem> </itemizedlist> <para>Future implementations might add those two missing parameters:</para> <itemizedlist mark='opencircle'> @@ -818,25 +821,18 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy { </section> <section id="dvbs2-params"> <title>DVB-S2 delivery system</title> - <para>The following parameters are valid for DVB-S2:</para> + <para>In addition to all parameters valid for DVB-S, DVB-S2 supports the following parameters:</para> <itemizedlist mark='opencircle'> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-API-VERSION"><constant>DTV_API_VERSION</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-DELIVERY-SYSTEM"><constant>DTV_DELIVERY_SYSTEM</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-TUNE"><constant>DTV_TUNE</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-CLEAR"><constant>DTV_CLEAR</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-FREQUENCY"><constant>DTV_FREQUENCY</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INVERSION"><constant>DTV_INVERSION</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-SYMBOL-RATE"><constant>DTV_SYMBOL_RATE</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INNER-FEC"><constant>DTV_INNER_FEC</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-VOLTAGE"><constant>DTV_VOLTAGE</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-TONE"><constant>DTV_TONE</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-MODULATION"><constant>DTV_MODULATION</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-PILOT"><constant>DTV_PILOT</constant></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ROLLOFF"><constant>DTV_ROLLOFF</constant></link></para></listitem> </itemizedlist> - <para>Future implementations might add those two missing parameters:</para> + </section> + <section id="turbo-params"> + <title>Turbo code delivery system</title> + <para>In addition to all parameters valid for DVB-S, turbo code supports the following parameters:</para> <itemizedlist mark='opencircle'> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-DISEQC-MASTER"><constant>DTV_DISEQC_MASTER</constant></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-DISEQC-SLAVE-REPLY"><constant>DTV_DISEQC_SLAVE_REPLY</constant></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-MODULATION"><constant>DTV_MODULATION</constant></link></para></listitem> </itemizedlist> </section> <section id="isdbs-params"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml index c75dc7cc3e9b..170064a3dc8f 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ a partial path like:</para> additional include file <emphasis role="tt">linux/dvb/version.h</emphasis> exists, which defines the constant <emphasis role="tt">DVB_API_VERSION</emphasis>. This document -describes <emphasis role="tt">DVB_API_VERSION 3</emphasis>. +describes <emphasis role="tt">DVB_API_VERSION 5.4</emphasis>. </para> </section> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml index ce1004a7da52..91410b6e7e08 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml @@ -2370,6 +2370,14 @@ that used it. It was originally scheduled for removal in 2.6.35. </listitem> </orderedlist> </section> + <section> + <title>V4L2 in Linux 3.2</title> + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE was added to signal volatile controls to userspace.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> <section id="other"> <title>Relation of V4L2 to other Linux multimedia APIs</title> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml index 05c8fefcbcbe..0916a7343a16 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ <para>When satisfied with the try results, applications can set the active formats by setting the <structfield>which</structfield> argument to - <constant>V4L2_SUBDEV_FORMAT_TRY</constant>. Active formats are changed + <constant>V4L2_SUBDEV_FORMAT_ACTIVE</constant>. Active formats are changed exactly as try formats by drivers. To avoid modifying the hardware state during format negotiation, applications should negotiate try formats first and then modify the active settings using the try formats returned during diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml index 0d05e8747c12..40132c277647 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml @@ -128,6 +128,13 @@ structs, ioctls) must be noted in more detail in the history chapter applications. --> <revision> + <revnumber>3.2</revnumber> + <date>2011-08-26</date> + <authorinitials>hv</authorinitials> + <revremark>Added V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE.</revremark> + </revision> + + <revision> <revnumber>3.1</revnumber> <date>2011-06-27</date> <authorinitials>mcc, po, hv</authorinitials> @@ -410,7 +417,7 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list.</revremark> </partinfo> <title>Video for Linux Two API Specification</title> - <subtitle>Revision 3.1</subtitle> + <subtitle>Revision 3.2</subtitle> <chapter id="common"> &sub-common; diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml index 7769642ee431..e8714aa16433 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml @@ -88,6 +88,12 @@ </row> <row> <entry></entry> + <entry>&v4l2-event-frame-sync;</entry> + <entry><structfield>frame</structfield></entry> + <entry>Event data for event V4L2_EVENT_FRAME_SYNC.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry></entry> <entry>__u8</entry> <entry><structfield>data</structfield>[64]</entry> <entry>Event data. Defined by the event type. The union @@ -135,6 +141,129 @@ </tgroup> </table> + <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-event-vsync"> + <title>struct <structname>v4l2_event_vsync</structname></title> + <tgroup cols="3"> + &cs-str; + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>__u8</entry> + <entry><structfield>field</structfield></entry> + <entry>The upcoming field. See &v4l2-field;.</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + + <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-event-ctrl"> + <title>struct <structname>v4l2_event_ctrl</structname></title> + <tgroup cols="4"> + &cs-str; + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>__u32</entry> + <entry><structfield>changes</structfield></entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry>A bitmask that tells what has changed. See <xref linkend="changes-flags" />.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>__u32</entry> + <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry>The type of the control. See &v4l2-ctrl-type;.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>union (anonymous)</entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry></entry> + <entry>__s32</entry> + <entry><structfield>value</structfield></entry> + <entry>The 32-bit value of the control for 32-bit control types. + This is 0 for string controls since the value of a string + cannot be passed using &VIDIOC-DQEVENT;.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry></entry> + <entry>__s64</entry> + <entry><structfield>value64</structfield></entry> + <entry>The 64-bit value of the control for 64-bit control types.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>__u32</entry> + <entry><structfield>flags</structfield></entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry>The control flags. See <xref linkend="control-flags" />.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>__s32</entry> + <entry><structfield>minimum</structfield></entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry>The minimum value of the control. See &v4l2-queryctrl;.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>__s32</entry> + <entry><structfield>maximum</structfield></entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry>The maximum value of the control. See &v4l2-queryctrl;.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>__s32</entry> + <entry><structfield>step</structfield></entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry>The step value of the control. See &v4l2-queryctrl;.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>__s32</entry> + <entry><structfield>default_value</structfield></entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry>The default value value of the control. See &v4l2-queryctrl;.</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + + <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-event-frame-sync"> + <title>struct <structname>v4l2_event_frame_sync</structname></title> + <tgroup cols="3"> + &cs-str; + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>__u32</entry> + <entry><structfield>frame_sequence</structfield></entry> + <entry> + The sequence number of the frame being received. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + + <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="changes-flags"> + <title>Changes</title> + <tgroup cols="3"> + &cs-def; + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_CTRL_CH_VALUE</constant></entry> + <entry>0x0001</entry> + <entry>This control event was triggered because the value of the control + changed. Special case: if a button control is pressed, then this + event is sent as well, even though there is not explicit value + associated with a button control.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_CTRL_CH_FLAGS</constant></entry> + <entry>0x0002</entry> + <entry>This control event was triggered because the control flags + changed.</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> </refsect1> <refsect1> &return-value; diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml index 677ea646c29f..0ac0057a51c4 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml @@ -406,6 +406,15 @@ flag is typically present for relative controls or action controls where writing a value will cause the device to carry out a given action (⪚ motor control) but no meaningful value can be returned.</entry> </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE</constant></entry> + <entry>0x0080</entry> + <entry>This control is volatile, which means that the value of the control +changes continuously. A typical example would be the current gain value if the device +is in auto-gain mode. In such a case the hardware calculates the gain value based on +the lighting conditions which can change over time. Note that setting a new value for +a volatile control will have no effect. The new value will just be ignored.</entry> + </row> </tbody> </tgroup> </table> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml index 69c0d8a2a3d2..5c70b616d818 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml @@ -139,6 +139,22 @@ </entry> </row> <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_FRAME_SYNC</constant></entry> + <entry>4</entry> + <entry> + <para>Triggered immediately when the reception of a + frame has begun. This event has a + &v4l2-event-frame-sync; associated with it.</para> + + <para>If the hardware needs to be stopped in the case of a + buffer underrun it might not be able to generate this event. + In such cases the <structfield>frame_sequence</structfield> + field in &v4l2-event-frame-sync; will not be incremented. This + causes two consecutive frame sequence numbers to have n times + frame interval in between them.</para> + </entry> + </row> + <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_PRIVATE_START</constant></entry> <entry>0x08000000</entry> <entry>Base event number for driver-private events.</entry> @@ -183,113 +199,6 @@ </tgroup> </table> - <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-event-vsync"> - <title>struct <structname>v4l2_event_vsync</structname></title> - <tgroup cols="3"> - &cs-str; - <tbody valign="top"> - <row> - <entry>__u8</entry> - <entry><structfield>field</structfield></entry> - <entry>The upcoming field. See &v4l2-field;.</entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - - <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-event-ctrl"> - <title>struct <structname>v4l2_event_ctrl</structname></title> - <tgroup cols="4"> - &cs-str; - <tbody valign="top"> - <row> - <entry>__u32</entry> - <entry><structfield>changes</structfield></entry> - <entry></entry> - <entry>A bitmask that tells what has changed. See <xref linkend="changes-flags" />.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry>__u32</entry> - <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry> - <entry></entry> - <entry>The type of the control. See &v4l2-ctrl-type;.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry>union (anonymous)</entry> - <entry></entry> - <entry></entry> - <entry></entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry></entry> - <entry>__s32</entry> - <entry><structfield>value</structfield></entry> - <entry>The 32-bit value of the control for 32-bit control types. - This is 0 for string controls since the value of a string - cannot be passed using &VIDIOC-DQEVENT;.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry></entry> - <entry>__s64</entry> - <entry><structfield>value64</structfield></entry> - <entry>The 64-bit value of the control for 64-bit control types.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry>__u32</entry> - <entry><structfield>flags</structfield></entry> - <entry></entry> - <entry>The control flags. See <xref linkend="control-flags" />.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry>__s32</entry> - <entry><structfield>minimum</structfield></entry> - <entry></entry> - <entry>The minimum value of the control. See &v4l2-queryctrl;.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry>__s32</entry> - <entry><structfield>maximum</structfield></entry> - <entry></entry> - <entry>The maximum value of the control. See &v4l2-queryctrl;.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry>__s32</entry> - <entry><structfield>step</structfield></entry> - <entry></entry> - <entry>The step value of the control. See &v4l2-queryctrl;.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry>__s32</entry> - <entry><structfield>default_value</structfield></entry> - <entry></entry> - <entry>The default value value of the control. See &v4l2-queryctrl;.</entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - - <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="changes-flags"> - <title>Changes</title> - <tgroup cols="3"> - &cs-def; - <tbody valign="top"> - <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_CTRL_CH_VALUE</constant></entry> - <entry>0x0001</entry> - <entry>This control event was triggered because the value of the control - changed. Special case: if a button control is pressed, then this - event is sent as well, even though there is not explicit value - associated with a button control.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_CTRL_CH_FLAGS</constant></entry> - <entry>0x0002</entry> - <entry>This control event was triggered because the control flags - changed.</entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> </refsect1> <refsect1> &return-value; diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl index 7c4b514d62b1..54883de5d5f9 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl @@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ memory (e.g. allocated with <function>kmalloc()</function>). There's also </para></listitem> <listitem><para> -<varname>unsigned long addr</varname>: Required if the mapping is used. +<varname>phys_addr_t addr</varname>: Required if the mapping is used. Fill in the address of your memory block. This address is the one that appears in sysfs. </para></listitem> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl index 598c22f3b3ac..5de23c007078 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl @@ -4288,7 +4288,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { <![CDATA[ struct snd_rawmidi *rmidi; snd_mpu401_uart_new(card, 0, MPU401_HW_MPU401, port, info_flags, - irq, irq_flags, &rmidi); + irq, &rmidi); ]]> </programlisting> </informalexample> @@ -4343,6 +4343,13 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { by itself to start processing the output stream in the irq handler. </para> + <para> + If the MPU-401 interface shares its interrupt with the other logical + devices on the card, set <constant>MPU401_INFO_IRQ_HOOK</constant> + (see <link linkend="midi-interface-interrupt-handler"><citetitle> + below</citetitle></link>). + </para> + <para> Usually, the port address corresponds to the command port and port + 1 corresponds to the data port. If not, you may change @@ -4375,14 +4382,12 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { </para> <para> - The 6th argument specifies the irq number for UART. If the irq - is already allocated, pass 0 to the 7th argument - (<parameter>irq_flags</parameter>). Otherwise, pass the flags - for irq allocation - (<constant>SA_XXX</constant> bits) to it, and the irq will be - reserved by the mpu401-uart layer. If the card doesn't generate - UART interrupts, pass -1 as the irq number. Then a timer - interrupt will be invoked for polling. + The 6th argument specifies the ISA irq number that will be + allocated. If no interrupt is to be allocated (because your + code is already allocating a shared interrupt, or because the + device does not use interrupts), pass -1 instead. + For a MPU-401 device without an interrupt, a polling timer + will be used instead. </para> </section> @@ -4390,12 +4395,13 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { <title>Interrupt Handler</title> <para> When the interrupt is allocated in - <function>snd_mpu401_uart_new()</function>, the private - interrupt handler is used, hence you don't have anything else to do - than creating the mpu401 stuff. Otherwise, you have to call - <function>snd_mpu401_uart_interrupt()</function> explicitly when - a UART interrupt is invoked and checked in your own interrupt - handler. + <function>snd_mpu401_uart_new()</function>, an exclusive ISA + interrupt handler is automatically used, hence you don't have + anything else to do than creating the mpu401 stuff. Otherwise, you + have to set <constant>MPU401_INFO_IRQ_HOOK</constant>, and call + <function>snd_mpu401_uart_interrupt()</function> explicitly from your + own interrupt handler when it has determined that a UART interrupt + has occurred. </para> <para> diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt b/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt index 6148d4080f88..aa09e5476bba 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ from the PCI device config space. Use the values in the pci_dev structure as the PCI "bus address" might have been remapped to a "host physical" address by the arch/chip-set specific kernel support. -See Documentation/IO-mapping.txt for how to access device registers +See Documentation/io-mapping.txt for how to access device registers or device memory. The device driver needs to call pci_request_region() to verify diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt index bf82851a0e57..687777f83b23 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ not to return until all ongoing NMI handlers exit. It is therefore safe to free up the handler's data as soon as synchronize_sched() returns. Important note: for this to work, the architecture in question must -invoke irq_enter() and irq_exit() on NMI entry and exit, respectively. +invoke nmi_enter() and nmi_exit() on NMI entry and exit, respectively. Answer to Quick Quiz diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bf9061142827 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +Lockdep-RCU was added to the Linux kernel in early 2010 +(http://lwn.net/Articles/371986/). This facility checks for some common +misuses of the RCU API, most notably using one of the rcu_dereference() +family to access an RCU-protected pointer without the proper protection. +When such misuse is detected, an lockdep-RCU splat is emitted. + +The usual cause of a lockdep-RCU slat is someone accessing an +RCU-protected data structure without either (1) being in the right kind of +RCU read-side critical section or (2) holding the right update-side lock. +This problem can therefore be serious: it might result in random memory +overwriting or worse. There can of course be false positives, this +being the real world and all that. + +So let's look at an example RCU lockdep splat from 3.0-rc5, one that +has long since been fixed: + +=============================== +[ INFO: suspicious RCU usage. ] +------------------------------- +block/cfq-iosched.c:2776 suspicious rcu_dereference_protected() usage! + +other info that might help us debug this: + + +rcu_scheduler_active = 1, debug_locks = 0 +3 locks held by scsi_scan_6/1552: + #0: (&shost->scan_mutex){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff8145efca>] +scsi_scan_host_selected+0x5a/0x150 + #1: (&eq->sysfs_lock){+.+...}, at: [<ffffffff812a5032>] +elevator_exit+0x22/0x60 + #2: (&(&q->__queue_lock)->rlock){-.-...}, at: [<ffffffff812b6233>] +cfq_exit_queue+0x43/0x190 + +stack backtrace: +Pid: 1552, comm: scsi_scan_6 Not tainted 3.0.0-rc5 #17 +Call Trace: + [<ffffffff810abb9b>] lockdep_rcu_dereference+0xbb/0xc0 + [<ffffffff812b6139>] __cfq_exit_single_io_context+0xe9/0x120 + [<ffffffff812b626c>] cfq_exit_queue+0x7c/0x190 + [<ffffffff812a5046>] elevator_exit+0x36/0x60 + [<ffffffff812a802a>] blk_cleanup_queue+0x4a/0x60 + [<ffffffff8145cc09>] scsi_free_queue+0x9/0x10 + [<ffffffff81460944>] __scsi_remove_device+0x84/0xd0 + [<ffffffff8145dca3>] scsi_probe_and_add_lun+0x353/0xb10 + [<ffffffff817da069>] ? error_exit+0x29/0xb0 + [<ffffffff817d98ed>] ? _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore+0x3d/0x80 + [<ffffffff8145e722>] __scsi_scan_target+0x112/0x680 + [<ffffffff812c690d>] ? trace_hardirqs_off_thunk+0x3a/0x3c + [<ffffffff817da069>] ? error_exit+0x29/0xb0 + [<ffffffff812bcc60>] ? kobject_del+0x40/0x40 + [<ffffffff8145ed16>] scsi_scan_channel+0x86/0xb0 + [<ffffffff8145f0b0>] scsi_scan_host_selected+0x140/0x150 + [<ffffffff8145f149>] do_scsi_scan_host+0x89/0x90 + [<ffffffff8145f170>] do_scan_async+0x20/0x160 + [<ffffffff8145f150>] ? do_scsi_scan_host+0x90/0x90 + [<ffffffff810975b6>] kthread+0xa6/0xb0 + [<ffffffff817db154>] kernel_thread_helper+0x4/0x10 + [<ffffffff81066430>] ? finish_task_switch+0x80/0x110 + [<ffffffff817d9c04>] ? retint_restore_args+0xe/0xe + [<ffffffff81097510>] ? __init_kthread_worker+0x70/0x70 + [<ffffffff817db150>] ? gs_change+0xb/0xb + +Line 2776 of block/cfq-iosched.c in v3.0-rc5 is as follows: + + if (rcu_dereference(ioc->ioc_data) == cic) { + +This form says that it must be in a plain vanilla RCU read-side critical +section, but the "other info" list above shows that this is not the +case. Instead, we hold three locks, one of which might be RCU related. +And maybe that lock really does protect this reference. If so, the fix +is to inform RCU, perhaps by changing __cfq_exit_single_io_context() to +take the struct request_queue "q" from cfq_exit_queue() as an argument, +which would permit us to invoke rcu_dereference_protected as follows: + + if (rcu_dereference_protected(ioc->ioc_data, + lockdep_is_held(&q->queue_lock)) == cic) { + +With this change, there would be no lockdep-RCU splat emitted if this +code was invoked either from within an RCU read-side critical section +or with the ->queue_lock held. In particular, this would have suppressed +the above lockdep-RCU splat because ->queue_lock is held (see #2 in the +list above). + +On the other hand, perhaps we really do need an RCU read-side critical +section. In this case, the critical section must span the use of the +return value from rcu_dereference(), or at least until there is some +reference count incremented or some such. One way to handle this is to +add rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock() as follows: + + rcu_read_lock(); + if (rcu_dereference(ioc->ioc_data) == cic) { + spin_lock(&ioc->lock); + rcu_assign_pointer(ioc->ioc_data, NULL); + spin_unlock(&ioc->lock); + } + rcu_read_unlock(); + +With this change, the rcu_dereference() is always within an RCU +read-side critical section, which again would have suppressed the +above lockdep-RCU splat. + +But in this particular case, we don't actually deference the pointer +returned from rcu_dereference(). Instead, that pointer is just compared +to the cic pointer, which means that the rcu_dereference() can be replaced +by rcu_access_pointer() as follows: + + if (rcu_access_pointer(ioc->ioc_data) == cic) { + +Because it is legal to invoke rcu_access_pointer() without protection, +this change would also suppress the above lockdep-RCU splat. diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt index d7a49b2f6994..a102d4b3724b 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt @@ -32,9 +32,27 @@ checking of rcu_dereference() primitives: srcu_dereference(p, sp): Check for SRCU read-side critical section. rcu_dereference_check(p, c): - Use explicit check expression "c". This is useful in - code that is invoked by both readers and updaters. - rcu_dereference_raw(p) + Use explicit check expression "c" along with + rcu_read_lock_held(). This is useful in code that is + invoked by both RCU readers and updaters. + rcu_dereference_bh_check(p, c): + Use explicit check expression "c" along with + rcu_read_lock_bh_held(). This is useful in code that + is invoked by both RCU-bh readers and updaters. + rcu_dereference_sched_check(p, c): + Use explicit check expression "c" along with + rcu_read_lock_sched_held(). This is useful in code that + is invoked by both RCU-sched readers and updaters. + srcu_dereference_check(p, c): + Use explicit check expression "c" along with + srcu_read_lock_held()(). This is useful in code that + is invoked by both SRCU readers and updaters. + rcu_dereference_index_check(p, c): + Use explicit check expression "c", but the caller + must supply one of the rcu_read_lock_held() functions. + This is useful in code that uses RCU-protected arrays + that is invoked by both RCU readers and updaters. + rcu_dereference_raw(p): Don't check. (Use sparingly, if at all.) rcu_dereference_protected(p, c): Use explicit check expression "c", and omit all barriers @@ -48,13 +66,11 @@ checking of rcu_dereference() primitives: value of the pointer itself, for example, against NULL. The rcu_dereference_check() check expression can be any boolean -expression, but would normally include one of the rcu_read_lock_held() -family of functions and a lockdep expression. However, any boolean -expression can be used. For a moderately ornate example, consider -the following: +expression, but would normally include a lockdep expression. However, +any boolean expression can be used. For a moderately ornate example, +consider the following: file = rcu_dereference_check(fdt->fd[fd], - rcu_read_lock_held() || lockdep_is_held(&files->file_lock) || atomic_read(&files->count) == 1); @@ -62,7 +78,7 @@ This expression picks up the pointer "fdt->fd[fd]" in an RCU-safe manner, and, if CONFIG_PROVE_RCU is configured, verifies that this expression is used in: -1. An RCU read-side critical section, or +1. An RCU read-side critical section (implicit), or 2. with files->file_lock held, or 3. on an unshared files_struct. diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt b/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt index 5d9016795fd8..783d6c134d3f 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ fqs_holdoff Holdoff time (in microseconds) between consecutive calls fqs_stutter Wait time (in seconds) between consecutive bursts of calls to force_quiescent_state(). -irqreaders Says to invoke RCU readers from irq level. This is currently +irqreader Says to invoke RCU readers from irq level. This is currently done via timers. Defaults to "1" for variants of RCU that permit this. (Or, more accurately, variants of RCU that do -not- permit this know to ignore this variable.) @@ -79,19 +79,68 @@ stutter The length of time to run the test before pausing for this Specifying "stutter=0" causes the test to run continuously without pausing, which is the old default behavior. +test_boost Whether or not to test the ability of RCU to do priority + boosting. Defaults to "test_boost=1", which performs + RCU priority-inversion testing only if the selected + RCU implementation supports priority boosting. Specifying + "test_boost=0" never performs RCU priority-inversion + testing. Specifying "test_boost=2" performs RCU + priority-inversion testing even if the selected RCU + implementation does not support RCU priority boosting, + which can be used to test rcutorture's ability to + carry out RCU priority-inversion testing. + +test_boost_interval + The number of seconds in an RCU priority-inversion test + cycle. Defaults to "test_boost_interval=7". It is + usually wise for this value to be relatively prime to + the value selected for "stutter". + +test_boost_duration + The number of seconds to do RCU priority-inversion testing + within any given "test_boost_interval". Defaults to + "test_boost_duration=4". + test_no_idle_hz Whether or not to test the ability of RCU to operate in a kernel that disables the scheduling-clock interrupt to idle CPUs. Boolean parameter, "1" to test, "0" otherwise. Defaults to omitting this test. -torture_type The type of RCU to test: "rcu" for the rcu_read_lock() API, - "rcu_sync" for rcu_read_lock() with synchronous reclamation, - "rcu_bh" for the rcu_read_lock_bh() API, "rcu_bh_sync" for - rcu_read_lock_bh() with synchronous reclamation, "srcu" for - the "srcu_read_lock()" API, "sched" for the use of - preempt_disable() together with synchronize_sched(), - and "sched_expedited" for the use of preempt_disable() - with synchronize_sched_expedited(). +torture_type The type of RCU to test, with string values as follows: + + "rcu": rcu_read_lock(), rcu_read_unlock() and call_rcu(). + + "rcu_sync": rcu_read_lock(), rcu_read_unlock(), and + synchronize_rcu(). + + "rcu_expedited": rcu_read_lock(), rcu_read_unlock(), and + synchronize_rcu_expedited(). + + "rcu_bh": rcu_read_lock_bh(), rcu_read_unlock_bh(), and + call_rcu_bh(). + + "rcu_bh_sync": rcu_read_lock_bh(), rcu_read_unlock_bh(), + and synchronize_rcu_bh(). + + "rcu_bh_expedited": rcu_read_lock_bh(), rcu_read_unlock_bh(), + and synchronize_rcu_bh_expedited(). + + "srcu": srcu_read_lock(), srcu_read_unlock() and + synchronize_srcu(). + + "srcu_expedited": srcu_read_lock(), srcu_read_unlock() and + synchronize_srcu_expedited(). + + "sched": preempt_disable(), preempt_enable(), and + call_rcu_sched(). + + "sched_sync": preempt_disable(), preempt_enable(), and + synchronize_sched(). + + "sched_expedited": preempt_disable(), preempt_enable(), and + synchronize_sched_expedited(). + + Defaults to "rcu". verbose Enable debug printk()s. Default is disabled. @@ -100,12 +149,12 @@ OUTPUT The statistics output is as follows: - rcu-torture: --- Start of test: nreaders=16 stat_interval=0 verbose=0 - rcu-torture: rtc: 0000000000000000 ver: 1916 tfle: 0 rta: 1916 rtaf: 0 rtf: 1915 - rcu-torture: Reader Pipe: 1466408 9747 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - rcu-torture: Reader Batch: 1464477 11678 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - rcu-torture: Free-Block Circulation: 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 0 - rcu-torture: --- End of test + rcu-torture:--- Start of test: nreaders=16 nfakewriters=4 stat_interval=30 verbose=0 test_no_idle_hz=1 shuffle_interval=3 stutter=5 irqreader=1 fqs_duration=0 fqs_holdoff=0 fqs_stutter=3 test_boost=1/0 test_boost_interval=7 test_boost_duration=4 + rcu-torture: rtc: (null) ver: 155441 tfle: 0 rta: 155441 rtaf: 8884 rtf: 155440 rtmbe: 0 rtbke: 0 rtbre: 0 rtbf: 0 rtb: 0 nt: 3055767 + rcu-torture: Reader Pipe: 727860534 34213 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 + rcu-torture: Reader Batch: 727877838 17003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 + rcu-torture: Free-Block Circulation: 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 0 + rcu-torture:--- End of test: SUCCESS: nreaders=16 nfakewriters=4 stat_interval=30 verbose=0 test_no_idle_hz=1 shuffle_interval=3 stutter=5 irqreader=1 fqs_duration=0 fqs_holdoff=0 fqs_stutter=3 test_boost=1/0 test_boost_interval=7 test_boost_duration=4 The command "dmesg | grep torture:" will extract this information on most systems. On more esoteric configurations, it may be necessary to @@ -113,26 +162,55 @@ use other commands to access the output of the printk()s used by the RCU torture test. The printk()s use KERN_ALERT, so they should be evident. ;-) +The first and last lines show the rcutorture module parameters, and the +last line shows either "SUCCESS" or "FAILURE", based on rcutorture's +automatic determination as to whether RCU operated correctly. + The entries are as follows: o "rtc": The hexadecimal address of the structure currently visible to readers. -o "ver": The number of times since boot that the rcutw writer task +o "ver": The number of times since boot that the RCU writer task has changed the structure visible to readers. o "tfle": If non-zero, indicates that the "torture freelist" - containing structure to be placed into the "rtc" area is empty. + containing structures to be placed into the "rtc" area is empty. This condition is important, since it can fool you into thinking that RCU is working when it is not. :-/ o "rta": Number of structures allocated from the torture freelist. o "rtaf": Number of allocations from the torture freelist that have - failed due to the list being empty. + failed due to the list being empty. It is not unusual for this + to be non-zero, but it is bad for it to be a large fraction of + the value indicated by "rta". o "rtf": Number of frees into the torture freelist. +o "rtmbe": A non-zero value indicates that rcutorture believes that + rcu_assign_pointer() and rcu_dereference() are not working + correctly. This value should be zero. + +o "rtbke": rcutorture was unable to create the real-time kthreads + used to force RCU priority inversion. This value should be zero. + +o "rtbre": Although rcutorture successfully created the kthreads + used to force RCU priority inversion, it was unable to set them + to the real-time priority level of 1. This value should be zero. + +o "rtbf": The number of times that RCU priority boosting failed + to resolve RCU priority inversion. + +o "rtb": The number of times that rcutorture attempted to force + an RCU priority inversion condition. If you are testing RCU + priority boosting via the "test_boost" module parameter, this + value should be non-zero. + +o "nt": The number of times rcutorture ran RCU read-side code from + within a timer handler. This value should be non-zero only + if you specified the "irqreader" module parameter. + o "Reader Pipe": Histogram of "ages" of structures seen by readers. If any entries past the first two are non-zero, RCU is broken. And rcutorture prints the error flag string "!!!" to make sure @@ -162,26 +240,15 @@ o "Free-Block Circulation": Shows the number of torture structures somehow gets incremented farther than it should. Different implementations of RCU can provide implementation-specific -additional information. For example, SRCU provides the following: +additional information. For example, SRCU provides the following +additional line: - srcu-torture: rtc: f8cf46a8 ver: 355 tfle: 0 rta: 356 rtaf: 0 rtf: 346 rtmbe: 0 - srcu-torture: Reader Pipe: 559738 939 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - srcu-torture: Reader Batch: 560434 243 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - srcu-torture: Free-Block Circulation: 355 354 353 352 351 350 349 348 347 346 0 srcu-torture: per-CPU(idx=1): 0(0,1) 1(0,1) 2(0,0) 3(0,1) -The first four lines are similar to those for RCU. The last line shows -the per-CPU counter state. The numbers in parentheses are the values -of the "old" and "current" counters for the corresponding CPU. The -"idx" value maps the "old" and "current" values to the underlying array, -and is useful for debugging. - -Similarly, sched_expedited RCU provides the following: - - sched_expedited-torture: rtc: d0000000016c1880 ver: 1090796 tfle: 0 rta: 1090796 rtaf: 0 rtf: 1090787 rtmbe: 0 nt: 27713319 - sched_expedited-torture: Reader Pipe: 12660320201 95875 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - sched_expedited-torture: Reader Batch: 12660424885 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - sched_expedited-torture: Free-Block Circulation: 1090795 1090795 1090794 1090793 1090792 1090791 1090790 1090789 1090788 1090787 0 +This line shows the per-CPU counter state. The numbers in parentheses are +the values of the "old" and "current" counters for the corresponding CPU. +The "idx" value maps the "old" and "current" values to the underlying +array, and is useful for debugging. USAGE diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt index 8173cec473aa..aaf65f6c6cd7 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt @@ -33,23 +33,23 @@ rcu/rcuboost: The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" looks as follows: rcu_sched: - 0 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=545/1/0 df=50 of=0 ri=0 ql=163 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/0 ktl=ebc3 b=10 ci=153737 co=0 ca=0 - 1 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=967/1/0 df=58 of=0 ri=0 ql=634 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/1 ktl=58c b=10 ci=191037 co=0 ca=0 - 2 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=1081/1/0 df=175 of=0 ri=0 ql=74 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/2 ktl=da94 b=10 ci=75991 co=0 ca=0 - 3 c=20942 g=20943 pq=1 pqc=20942 qp=1 dt=1846/0/0 df=404 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/3 ktl=d1cd b=10 ci=72261 co=0 ca=0 - 4 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=369/1/0 df=83 of=0 ri=0 ql=48 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/4 ktl=e0e7 b=10 ci=128365 co=0 ca=0 - 5 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=381/1/0 df=64 of=0 ri=0 ql=169 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/5 ktl=fb2f b=10 ci=164360 co=0 ca=0 - 6 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=1037/1/0 df=183 of=0 ri=0 ql=62 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/6 ktl=d2ad b=10 ci=65663 co=0 ca=0 - 7 c=20897 g=20897 pq=1 pqc=20896 qp=0 dt=1572/0/0 df=382 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/7 ktl=cf15 b=10 ci=75006 co=0 ca=0 + 0 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=545/1/0 df=50 of=0 ri=0 ql=163 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/0 ktl=ebc3 b=10 ci=153737 co=0 ca=0 + 1 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=967/1/0 df=58 of=0 ri=0 ql=634 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/1 ktl=58c b=10 ci=191037 co=0 ca=0 + 2 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=1081/1/0 df=175 of=0 ri=0 ql=74 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/2 ktl=da94 b=10 ci=75991 co=0 ca=0 + 3 c=20942 g=20943 pq=1 pgp=20942 qp=1 dt=1846/0/0 df=404 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/3 ktl=d1cd b=10 ci=72261 co=0 ca=0 + 4 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=369/1/0 df=83 of=0 ri=0 ql=48 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/4 ktl=e0e7 b=10 ci=128365 co=0 ca=0 + 5 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=381/1/0 df=64 of=0 ri=0 ql=169 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/5 ktl=fb2f b=10 ci=164360 co=0 ca=0 + 6 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=1037/1/0 df=183 of=0 ri=0 ql=62 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/6 ktl=d2ad b=10 ci=65663 co=0 ca=0 + 7 c=20897 g=20897 pq=1 pgp=20896 qp=0 dt=1572/0/0 df=382 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/7 ktl=cf15 b=10 ci=75006 co=0 ca=0 rcu_bh: - 0 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=545/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/0 ktl=ebc3 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 - 1 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=967/1/0 df=3 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/1 ktl=58c b=10 ci=151 co=0 ca=0 - 2 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=1081/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/2 ktl=da94 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 - 3 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=1846/0/0 df=8 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/3 ktl=d1cd b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 - 4 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=369/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/4 ktl=e0e7 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 - 5 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=381/1/0 df=4 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/5 ktl=fb2f b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 - 6 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=1037/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/6 ktl=d2ad b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 - 7 c=1474 g=1474 pq=1 pqc=1473 qp=0 dt=1572/0/0 df=8 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/7 ktl=cf15 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 0 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=545/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/0 ktl=ebc3 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 1 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=967/1/0 df=3 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/1 ktl=58c b=10 ci=151 co=0 ca=0 + 2 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=1081/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/2 ktl=da94 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 3 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=1846/0/0 df=8 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/3 ktl=d1cd b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 4 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=369/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/4 ktl=e0e7 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 5 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=381/1/0 df=4 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/5 ktl=fb2f b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 6 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=1037/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/6 ktl=d2ad b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 7 c=1474 g=1474 pq=1 pgp=1473 qp=0 dt=1572/0/0 df=8 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/7 ktl=cf15 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 The first section lists the rcu_data structures for rcu_sched, the second for rcu_bh. Note that CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernels will have an @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ o "pq" indicates that this CPU has passed through a quiescent state CPU has not yet reported that fact, (2) some other CPU has not yet reported for this grace period, or (3) both. -o "pqc" indicates which grace period the last-observed quiescent +o "pgp" indicates which grace period the last-observed quiescent state for this CPU corresponds to. This is important for handling the race between CPU 0 reporting an extended dynticks-idle quiescent state for CPU 1 and CPU 1 suddenly waking up and @@ -184,10 +184,14 @@ o "kt" is the per-CPU kernel-thread state. The digit preceding The number after the final slash is the CPU that the kthread is actually running on. + This field is displayed only for CONFIG_RCU_BOOST kernels. + o "ktl" is the low-order 16 bits (in hexadecimal) of the count of the number of times that this CPU's per-CPU kthread has gone through its loop servicing invoke_rcu_cpu_kthread() requests. + This field is displayed only for CONFIG_RCU_BOOST kernels. + o "b" is the batch limit for this CPU. If more than this number of RCU callbacks is ready to invoke, then the remainder will be deferred. diff --git a/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt b/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt index f731c1e56475..d36b01f778b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt +++ b/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ /* - * File: Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-note.txt + * File: Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt * Based on: * Author: * diff --git a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt index c6d84cfd2f56..e418dc0a7086 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ a virtual address mapping (unlike the earlier scheme of virtual address do not have a corresponding kernel virtual address space mapping) and low-memory pages. -Note: Please refer to Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt for a discussion +Note: Please refer to Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt for a discussion on PCI high mem DMA aspects and mapping of scatter gather lists, and support for 64 bit PCI. diff --git a/Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt b/Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt index 1b5aa10df845..2bc55ff3b4d1 100644 --- a/Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt +++ b/Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ [ NOTE: The virt_to_bus() and bus_to_virt() functions have been superseded by the functionality provided by the PCI DMA interface - (see Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt). They continue + (see Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt). They continue to be documented below for historical purposes, but new code must not use them. --davidm 00/12/12 ] diff --git a/Documentation/cdrom/packet-writing.txt b/Documentation/cdrom/packet-writing.txt index 13c251d5add6..2834170d821e 100644 --- a/Documentation/cdrom/packet-writing.txt +++ b/Documentation/cdrom/packet-writing.txt @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ this interface. (see http://tom.ist-im-web.de/download/pktcdvd ) For a description of the sysfs interface look into the file: - Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-pktcdvd + Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-pktcdvd Using the pktcdvd debugfs interface diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt index e74d0a2eb1cf..d221781dabaa 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ The sampling rate is limited by the HW transition latency: transition_latency * 100 Or by kernel restrictions: If CONFIG_NO_HZ is set, the limit is 10ms fixed. -If CONFIG_NO_HZ is not set or no_hz=off boot parameter is used, the +If CONFIG_NO_HZ is not set or nohz=off boot parameter is used, the limits depend on the CONFIG_HZ option: HZ=1000: min=20000us (20ms) HZ=250: min=80000us (80ms) diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding b/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding index 83f5f5b365a3..e3cb6a56653a 100644 --- a/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding +++ b/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ enabled, a configurable percentage of memory allocations will be made to fail; these failures can be restricted to a specific range of code. Running with fault injection enabled allows the programmer to see how the code responds when things go badly. See -Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.text for more information on +Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt for more information on how to use this facility. Other kinds of errors can be found with the "sparse" static analysis tool. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4755caaccba6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +Calxeda Highbank Platforms Device Tree Bindings +----------------------------------------------- + +Boards with Calxeda Cortex-A9 based Highbank SOC shall have the following +properties. + +Required root node properties: + - compatible = "calxeda,highbank"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c9848ad0e2e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +Freescale i.MX Platforms Device Tree Bindings +----------------------------------------------- + +i.MX51 Babbage Board +Required root node properties: + - compatible = "fsl,imx51-babbage", "fsl,imx51"; + +i.MX53 Automotive Reference Design Board +Required root node properties: + - compatible = "fsl,imx53-ard", "fsl,imx53"; + +i.MX53 Evaluation Kit +Required root node properties: + - compatible = "fsl,imx53-evk", "fsl,imx53"; + +i.MX53 Quick Start Board +Required root node properties: + - compatible = "fsl,imx53-qsb", "fsl,imx53"; + +i.MX53 Smart Mobile Reference Design Board +Required root node properties: + - compatible = "fsl,imx53-smd", "fsl,imx53"; + +i.MX6 Quad SABRE Automotive Board +Required root node properties: + - compatible = "fsl,imx6q-sabreauto", "fsl,imx6q"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..52916b4aa1fe --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +* ARM Generic Interrupt Controller + +ARM SMP cores are often associated with a GIC, providing per processor +interrupts (PPI), shared processor interrupts (SPI) and software +generated interrupts (SGI). + +Primary GIC is attached directly to the CPU and typically has PPIs and SGIs. +Secondary GICs are cascaded into the upward interrupt controller and do not +have PPIs or SGIs. + +Main node required properties: + +- compatible : should be one of: + "arm,cortex-a9-gic" + "arm,arm11mp-gic" +- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller +- #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + interrupt source. The type shall be a <u32> and the value shall be 3. + + The 1st cell is the interrupt type; 0 for SPI interrupts, 1 for PPI + interrupts. + + The 2nd cell contains the interrupt number for the interrupt type. + SPI interrupts are in the range [0-987]. PPI interrupts are in the + range [0-15]. + + The 3rd cell is the flags, encoded as follows: + bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags. + 1 = low-to-high edge triggered + 2 = high-to-low edge triggered + 4 = active high level-sensitive + 8 = active low level-sensitive + bits[15:8] PPI interrupt cpu mask. Each bit corresponds to each of + the 8 possible cpus attached to the GIC. A bit set to '1' indicated + the interrupt is wired to that CPU. Only valid for PPI interrupts. + +- reg : Specifies base physical address(s) and size of the GIC registers. The + first region is the GIC distributor register base and size. The 2nd region is + the GIC cpu interface register base and size. + +Optional +- interrupts : Interrupt source of the parent interrupt controller. Only + present on secondary GICs. + +Example: + + intc: interrupt-controller@fff11000 { + compatible = "arm,cortex-a9-gic"; + #interrupt-cells = <3>; + #address-cells = <1>; + interrupt-controller; + reg = <0xfff11000 0x1000>, + <0xfff10100 0x100>; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7ca52161e7ab --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +* ARM L2 Cache Controller + +ARM cores often have a separate level 2 cache controller. There are various +implementations of the L2 cache controller with compatible programming models. +The ARM L2 cache representation in the device tree should be done as follows: + +Required properties: + +- compatible : should be one of: + "arm,pl310-cache" + "arm,l220-cache" + "arm,l210-cache" +- cache-unified : Specifies the cache is a unified cache. +- cache-level : Should be set to 2 for a level 2 cache. +- reg : Physical base address and size of cache controller's memory mapped + registers. + +Optional properties: + +- arm,data-latency : Cycles of latency for Data RAM accesses. Specifies 3 cells of + read, write and setup latencies. Minimum valid values are 1. Controllers + without setup latency control should use a value of 0. +- arm,tag-latency : Cycles of latency for Tag RAM accesses. Specifies 3 cells of + read, write and setup latencies. Controllers without setup latency control + should use 0. Controllers without separate read and write Tag RAM latency + values should only use the first cell. +- arm,dirty-latency : Cycles of latency for Dirty RAMs. This is a single cell. +- arm,filter-ranges : <start length> Starting address and length of window to + filter. Addresses in the filter window are directed to the M1 port. Other + addresses will go to the M0 port. +- interrupts : 1 combined interrupt. + +Example: + +L2: cache-controller { + compatible = "arm,pl310-cache"; + reg = <0xfff12000 0x1000>; + arm,data-latency = <1 1 1>; + arm,tag-latency = <2 2 2>; + arm,filter-latency = <0x80000000 0x8000000>; + cache-unified; + cache-level = <2>; + interrupts = <45>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/dsp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/dsp.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d3830a32ce08 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/dsp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +* TI - DSP (Digital Signal Processor) + +TI DSP included in OMAP SoC + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "ti,omap3-c64" for OMAP3 & 4 +- ti,hwmods: "dsp" + +Examples: + +dsp { + compatible = "ti,omap3-c64"; + ti,hwmods = "dsp"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/iva.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/iva.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6d6295171358 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/iva.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +* TI - IVA (Imaging and Video Accelerator) subsystem + +The IVA contain various audio, video or imaging HW accelerator +depending of the version. + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be: + - "ti,ivahd" for OMAP4 + - "ti,iva2.2" for OMAP3 + - "ti,iva2.1" for OMAP2430 + - "ti,iva1" for OMAP2420 +- ti,hwmods: "iva" + +Examples: + +iva { + compatible = "ti,ivahd", "ti,iva"; + ti,hwmods = "iva"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l3-noc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l3-noc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6888a5efc860 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l3-noc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +* TI - L3 Network On Chip (NoC) + +This version is an implementation of the generic NoC IP +provided by Arteris. + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "ti,omap3-l3-smx" for OMAP3 family + Should be "ti,omap4-l3-noc" for OMAP4 family +- ti,hwmods: "l3_main_1", ... One hwmod for each noc domain. + +Examples: + +ocp { + compatible = "ti,omap4-l3-noc", "simple-bus"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges; + ti,hwmods = "l3_main_1", "l3_main_2", "l3_main_3"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/mpu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/mpu.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1a5a42ce21bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/mpu.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +* TI - MPU (Main Processor Unit) subsystem + +The MPU subsystem contain one or several ARM cores +depending of the version. +The MPU contain CPUs, GIC, L2 cache and a local PRCM. + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "ti,omap3-mpu" for OMAP3 + Should be "ti,omap4-mpu" for OMAP4 +- ti,hwmods: "mpu" + +Examples: + +- For an OMAP4 SMP system: + +mpu { + compatible = "ti,omap4-mpu"; + ti,hwmods = "mpu"; +}; + + +- For an OMAP3 monocore system: + +mpu { + compatible = "ti,omap3-mpu"; + ti,hwmods = "mpu"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dbdab40ed3a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +* Texas Instruments OMAP + +OMAP is currently using a static file per SoC family to describe the +IPs present in the SoC. +On top of that an omap_device is created to extend the platform_device +capabilities and to allow binding with one or several hwmods. +The hwmods will contain all the information to build the device: +adresse range, irq lines, dma lines, interconnect, PRCM register, +clock domain, input clocks. +For the moment just point to the existing hwmod, the next step will be +to move data from hwmod to device-tree representation. + + +Required properties: +- compatible: Every devices present in OMAP SoC should be in the + form: "ti,XXX" +- ti,hwmods: list of hwmod names (ascii strings), that comes from the OMAP + HW documentation, attached to a device. Must contain at least + one hwmod. + +Optional properties: +- ti,no_idle_on_suspend: When present, it prevents the PM to idle the module + during suspend. + + +Example: + +spinlock@1 { + compatible = "ti,omap4-spinlock"; + ti,hwmods = "spinlock"; +}; + + +Boards: + +- OMAP3 BeagleBoard : Low cost community board + compatible = "ti,omap3-beagle", "ti,omap3" + +- OMAP4 SDP : Software Developement Board + compatible = "ti,omap4-sdp", "ti,omap4430" + +- OMAP4 PandaBoard : Low cost community board + compatible = "ti,omap4-panda", "ti,omap4430" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/picoxcell.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/picoxcell.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e75c0ef51e69 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/picoxcell.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Picochip picoXcell device tree bindings. +======================================== + +Required root node properties: + - compatible: + - "picochip,pc7302-pc3x3" : PC7302 development board with PC3X3 device. + - "picochip,pc7302-pc3x2" : PC7302 development board with PC3X2 device. + - "picochip,pc3x3" : picoXcell PC3X3 device based board. + - "picochip,pc3x2" : picoXcell PC3X2 device based board. + +Timers required properties: + - compatible = "picochip,pc3x2-timer" + - interrupts : The single IRQ line for the timer. + - clock-freq : The frequency in HZ of the timer. + - reg : The register bank for the timer. + +Note: two timers are required - one for the scheduler clock and one for the +event tick/NOHZ. + +VIC required properties: + - compatible = "arm,pl192-vic". + - interrupt-controller. + - reg : The register bank for the device. + - #interrupt-cells : Must be 1. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/primecell.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/primecell.txt index 1d5d7a870ec7..951ca46789d4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/primecell.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/primecell.txt @@ -6,7 +6,9 @@ driver matching. Required properties: -- compatible : should be a specific value for peripheral and "arm,primecell" +- compatible : should be a specific name for the peripheral and + "arm,primecell". The specific name will match the ARM + engineering name for the logic block in the form: "arm,pl???" Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/picochip-spacc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/picochip-spacc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d8609ece1f4c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/picochip-spacc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +Picochip picoXcell SPAcc (Security Protocol Accelerator) bindings + +Picochip picoXcell devices contain crypto offload engines that may be used for +IPSEC and femtocell layer 2 ciphering. + +Required properties: + - compatible : "picochip,spacc-ipsec" for the IPSEC offload engine + "picochip,spacc-l2" for the femtocell layer 2 ciphering engine. + - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device + - interrupt-parent : The interrupt controller that controls the SPAcc + interrupt. + - interrupts : The interrupt line from the SPAcc. + - ref-clock : The input clock that drives the SPAcc. + +Example SPAcc node: + +spacc@10000 { + compatible = "picochip,spacc-ipsec"; + reg = <0x100000 0x10000>; + interrupt-parent = <&vic0>; + interrupts = <24>; + ref-clock = <&ipsec_clk>, "ref"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt index 064db928c3c1..141087cf3107 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ node's name represents the name of the corresponding LED. LED sub-node properties: - gpios : Should specify the LED's GPIO, see "Specifying GPIO information - for devices" in Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt. Active + for devices" in Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt. Active low LEDs should be indicated using flags in the GPIO specifier. - label : (optional) The label for this LED. If omitted, the label is taken from the node name (excluding the unit address). diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/pl061-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/pl061-gpio.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a2c416bcbccc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/pl061-gpio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +ARM PL061 GPIO controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : "arm,pl061", "arm,primecell" +- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the + second cell is used to specify optional parameters: + - bit 0 specifies polarity (0 for normal, 1 for inverted) +- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. +- interrupts : Interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ. + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-imx-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-imx-i2c.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f3cf43b66f7e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-imx-i2c.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +* Freescale Inter IC (I2C) and High Speed Inter IC (HS-I2C) for i.MX + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "fsl,<chip>-i2c" +- reg : Should contain I2C/HS-I2C registers location and length +- interrupts : Should contain I2C/HS-I2C interrupt + +Optional properties: +- clock-frequency : Constains desired I2C/HS-I2C bus clock frequency in Hz. + The absence of the propoerty indicates the default frequency 100 kHz. + +Examples: + +i2c@83fc4000 { /* I2C2 on i.MX51 */ + compatible = "fsl,imx51-i2c", "fsl,imx1-i2c"; + reg = <0x83fc4000 0x4000>; + interrupts = <63>; +}; + +i2c@70038000 { /* HS-I2C on i.MX51 */ + compatible = "fsl,imx51-i2c", "fsl,imx1-i2c"; + reg = <0x70038000 0x4000>; + interrupts = <64>; + clock-frequency = <400000>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/samsung-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/samsung-i2c.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..38832c712919 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/samsung-i2c.txt @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +* Samsung's I2C controller + +The Samsung's I2C controller is used to interface with I2C devices. + +Required properties: + - compatible: value should be either of the following. + (a) "samsung, s3c2410-i2c", for i2c compatible with s3c2410 i2c. + (b) "samsung, s3c2440-i2c", for i2c compatible with s3c2440 i2c. + - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. + - interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu. + - samsung,i2c-sda-delay: Delay (in ns) applied to data line (SDA) edges. + - gpios: The order of the gpios should be the following: <SDA, SCL>. + The gpio specifier depends on the gpio controller. + +Optional properties: + - samsung,i2c-slave-addr: Slave address in multi-master enviroment. If not + specified, default value is 0. + - samsung,i2c-max-bus-freq: Desired frequency in Hz of the bus. If not + specified, the default value in Hz is 100000. + +Example: + + i2c@13870000 { + compatible = "samsung,s3c2440-i2c"; + reg = <0x13870000 0x100>; + interrupts = <345>; + samsung,i2c-sda-delay = <100>; + samsung,i2c-max-bus-freq = <100000>; + gpios = <&gpd1 2 0 /* SDA */ + &gpd1 3 0 /* SCL */>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + wm8994@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8994"; + reg = <0x1a>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia-sdhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia-sdhci.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7e51154679a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia-sdhci.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +* NVIDIA Tegra Secure Digital Host Controller + +This controller on Tegra family SoCs provides an interface for MMC, SD, +and SDIO types of memory cards. + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "nvidia,<chip>-sdhci" +- reg : Should contain SD/MMC registers location and length +- interrupts : Should contain SD/MMC interrupt + +Optional properties: +- cd-gpios : Specify GPIOs for card detection +- wp-gpios : Specify GPIOs for write protection +- power-gpios : Specify GPIOs for power control +- support-8bit : Boolean, indicates if 8-bit mode should be used. + +Example: + +sdhci@c8000200 { + compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-sdhci"; + reg = <0xc8000200 0x200>; + interrupts = <47>; + cd-gpios = <&gpio 69 0>; /* gpio PI5 */ + wp-gpios = <&gpio 57 0>; /* gpio PH1 */ + power-gpios = <&gpio 155 0>; /* gpio PT3 */ + support-8bit; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt index 1a729f089866..1ad80d5865a9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt @@ -1,61 +1,24 @@ -CAN Device Tree Bindings ------------------------- -2011 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. +Flexcan CAN contoller on Freescale's ARM and PowerPC system-on-a-chip (SOC). -fsl,flexcan-v1.0 nodes ------------------------ -In addition to the required compatible-, reg- and interrupt-properties, you can -also specify which clock source shall be used for the controller. +Required properties: -CPI Clock- Can Protocol Interface Clock - This CLK_SRC bit of CTRL(control register) selects the clock source to - the CAN Protocol Interface(CPI) to be either the peripheral clock - (driven by the PLL) or the crystal oscillator clock. The selected clock - is the one fed to the prescaler to generate the Serial Clock (Sclock). - The PRESDIV field of CTRL(control register) controls a prescaler that - generates the Serial Clock (Sclock), whose period defines the - time quantum used to compose the CAN waveform. +- compatible : Should be "fsl,<processor>-flexcan" -Can Engine Clock Source - There are two sources for CAN clock - - Platform Clock It represents the bus clock - - Oscillator Clock + An implementation should also claim any of the following compatibles + that it is fully backwards compatible with: - Peripheral Clock (PLL) - -------------- - | - --------- ------------- - | |CPI Clock | Prescaler | Sclock - | |---------------->| (1.. 256) |------------> - --------- ------------- - | | - -------------- ---------------------CLK_SRC - Oscillator Clock + - fsl,p1010-flexcan -- fsl,flexcan-clock-source : CAN Engine Clock Source.This property selects - the peripheral clock. PLL clock is fed to the - prescaler to generate the Serial Clock (Sclock). - Valid values are "oscillator" and "platform" - "oscillator": CAN engine clock source is oscillator clock. - "platform" The CAN engine clock source is the bus clock - (platform clock). +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device +- interrupts : Interrupt tuple for this device +- clock-frequency : The oscillator frequency driving the flexcan device -- fsl,flexcan-clock-divider : for the reference and system clock, an additional - clock divider can be specified. -- clock-frequency: frequency required to calculate the bitrate for FlexCAN. +Example: -Note: - - v1.0 of flexcan-v1.0 represent the IP block version for P1010 SOC. - - P1010 does not have oscillator as the Clock Source.So the default - Clock Source is platform clock. -Examples: - - can0@1c000 { - compatible = "fsl,flexcan-v1.0"; + can@1c000 { + compatible = "fsl,p1010-flexcan"; reg = <0x1c000 0x1000>; interrupts = <48 0x2>; interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; - fsl,flexcan-clock-source = "platform"; - fsl,flexcan-clock-divider = <2>; - clock-frequency = <fixed by u-boot>; + clock-frequency = <200000000>; // filled in by bootloader }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc911x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc911x.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..adb5b5744ecd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc911x.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +* Smart Mixed-Signal Connectivity (SMSC) LAN911x/912x Controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "smsc,lan<model>", "smsc,lan9115" +- reg : Address and length of the io space for SMSC LAN +- interrupts : Should contain SMSC LAN interrupt line +- interrupt-parent : Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller + that services interrupts for this device +- phy-mode : String, operation mode of the PHY interface. + Supported values are: "mii", "gmii", "sgmii", "tbi", "rmii", + "rgmii", "rgmii-id", "rgmii-rxid", "rgmii-txid", "rtbi", "smii". + +Optional properties: +- reg-shift : Specify the quantity to shift the register offsets by +- reg-io-width : Specify the size (in bytes) of the IO accesses that + should be performed on the device. Valid value for SMSC LAN is + 2 or 4. If it's omitted or invalid, the size would be 2. +- smsc,irq-active-high : Indicates the IRQ polarity is active-high +- smsc,irq-push-pull : Indicates the IRQ type is push-pull +- smsc,force-internal-phy : Forces SMSC LAN controller to use + internal PHY +- smsc,force-external-phy : Forces SMSC LAN controller to use + external PHY +- smsc,save-mac-address : Indicates that mac address needs to be saved + before resetting the controller +- local-mac-address : 6 bytes, mac address + +Examples: + +lan9220@f4000000 { + compatible = "smsc,lan9220", "smsc,lan9115"; + reg = <0xf4000000 0x2000000>; + phy-mode = "mii"; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>; + interrupts = <31>; + reg-io-width = <4>; + smsc,irq-push-pull; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinmux/pinmux_nvidia.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinmux/pinmux_nvidia.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..36f82dbdd14d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinmux/pinmux_nvidia.txt @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +NVIDIA Tegra 2 pinmux controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : "nvidia,tegra20-pinmux" + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1e753c69fc83 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +* RS485 serial communications + +The RTS signal is capable of automatically controlling line direction for +the built-in half-duplex mode. +The properties described hereafter shall be given to a half-duplex capable +UART node. + +Required properties: +- rs485-rts-delay: prop-encoded-array <a b> where: + * a is the delay beteween rts signal and beginning of data sent in milliseconds. + it corresponds to the delay before sending data. + * b is the delay between end of data sent and rts signal in milliseconds + it corresponds to the delay after sending data and actual release of the line. + +Optional properties: +- linux,rs485-enabled-at-boot-time: empty property telling to enable the rs485 + feature at boot time. It can be disabled later with proper ioctl. +- rs485-rx-during-tx: empty property that enables the receiving of data even + whilst sending data. + +RS485 example for Atmel USART: + usart0: serial@fff8c000 { + compatible = "atmel,at91sam9260-usart"; + reg = <0xfff8c000 0x4000>; + interrupts = <7>; + atmel,use-dma-rx; + atmel,use-dma-tx; + linux,rs485-enabled-at-boot-time; + rs485-rts-delay = <0 200>; // in milliseconds + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/soc/codecs/fsl-sgtl5000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/soc/codecs/fsl-sgtl5000.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2c3cd413f042 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/soc/codecs/fsl-sgtl5000.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +* Freescale SGTL5000 Stereo Codec + +Required properties: +- compatible : "fsl,sgtl5000". + +Example: + +codec: sgtl5000@0a { + compatible = "fsl,sgtl5000"; + reg = <0x0a>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8510.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8510.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fa1a32b85577 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8510.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8510 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8510" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8510@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8510"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8523.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8523.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..04746186b283 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8523.txt @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +WM8523 audio CODEC + +This device supports I2C only. + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8523" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device. + +Example: + +codec: wm8523@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8523"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8580.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8580.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7d9821f348da --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8580.txt @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +WM8580 audio CODEC + +This device supports I2C only. + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8580" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device. + +Example: + +codec: wm8580@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8580"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8711.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8711.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8ed9998cd23c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8711.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8711 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8711" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8711@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8711"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8728.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8728.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a8b5c3668e60 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8728.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8728 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8728" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8728@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8728"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8731.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8731.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..15f70048469b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8731.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8731 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8731" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8731@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8731"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8737.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8737.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4bc2cea3b140 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8737.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8737 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8737" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8737@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8737"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8741.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8741.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..74bda58c1bcf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8741.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8741 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8741" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8741@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8741"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8750.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8750.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8db239fd5ecd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8750.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8750 and WM8987 audio CODECs + +These devices support both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8750" or "wlf,wm8987" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8750@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8750"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8753.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8753.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e65277a0fb60 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8753.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8753 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8753" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8737@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8753"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8770.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8770.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..866e00ca150b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8770.txt @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +WM8770 audio CODEC + +This device supports SPI. + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8770" + + - reg : the chip select number. + +Example: + +codec: wm8770@1 { + compatible = "wlf,wm8770"; + reg = <1>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8776.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8776.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3b9ca49abc2b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8776.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8776 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8776" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8776@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8776"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8804.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8804.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4d3a56f38adc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8804.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8804 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8804" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8804@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8804"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_pl022.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_pl022.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..306ec3ff3c0e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_pl022.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +ARM PL022 SPI controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : "arm,pl022", "arm,primecell" +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device +- interrupts : Should contain SPI controller interrupt + +Optional properties: +- cs-gpios : should specify GPIOs used for chipselects. + The gpios will be referred to as reg = <index> in the SPI child nodes. + If unspecified, a single SPI device without a chip select can be used. + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/atmel-usart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/atmel-usart.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a49d9a1d4ccf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/atmel-usart.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +* Atmel Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (USART) + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-usart" + The compatible <chip> indicated will be the first SoC to support an + additional mode or an USART new feature. +- reg: Should contain registers location and length +- interrupts: Should contain interrupt + +Optional properties: +- atmel,use-dma-rx: use of PDC or DMA for receiving data +- atmel,use-dma-tx: use of PDC or DMA for transmitting data + +<chip> compatible description: +- at91rm9200: legacy USART support +- at91sam9260: generic USART implementation for SAM9 SoCs + +Example: + + usart0: serial@fff8c000 { + compatible = "atmel,at91sam9260-usart"; + reg = <0xfff8c000 0x4000>; + interrupts = <7>; + atmel,use-dma-rx; + atmel,use-dma-tx; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/msm_serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/msm_serial.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..aef383eb8876 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/msm_serial.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +* Qualcomm MSM UART + +Required properties: +- compatible : + - "qcom,msm-uart", and one of "qcom,msm-hsuart" or + "qcom,msm-lsuart". +- reg : offset and length of the register set for the device + for the hsuart operating in compatible mode, there should be a + second pair describing the gsbi registers. +- interrupts : should contain the uart interrupt. + +There are two different UART blocks used in MSM devices, +"qcom,msm-hsuart" and "qcom,msm-lsuart". The msm-serial driver is +able to handle both of these, and matches against the "qcom,msm-uart" +as the compatibility. + +The registers for the "qcom,msm-hsuart" device need to specify both +register blocks, even for the common driver. + +Example: + + uart@19c400000 { + compatible = "qcom,msm-hsuart", "qcom,msm-uart"; + reg = <0x19c40000 0x1000>, + <0x19c00000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <195>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f13f1c5be91c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +* Synopsys DesignWare ABP UART + +Required properties: +- compatible : "snps,dw-apb-uart" +- reg : offset and length of the register set for the device. +- interrupts : should contain uart interrupt. +- clock-frequency : the input clock frequency for the UART. + +Optional properties: +- reg-shift : quantity to shift the register offsets by. If this property is + not present then the register offsets are not shifted. +- reg-io-width : the size (in bytes) of the IO accesses that should be + performed on the device. If this property is not present then single byte + accesses are used. + +Example: + + uart@80230000 { + compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart"; + reg = <0x80230000 0x100>; + clock-frequency = <3686400>; + interrupts = <10>; + reg-shift = <2>; + reg-io-width = <4>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e8552782b440 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +Device tree binding vendor prefix registry. Keep list in alphabetical order. + +This isn't an exhaustive list, but you should add new prefixes to it before +using them to avoid name-space collisions. + +adi Analog Devices, Inc. +amcc Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM, formally AMCC) +apm Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM) +arm ARM Ltd. +atmel Atmel Corporation +chrp Common Hardware Reference Platform +dallas Maxim Integrated Products (formerly Dallas Semiconductor) +denx Denx Software Engineering +epson Seiko Epson Corp. +est ESTeem Wireless Modems +fsl Freescale Semiconductor +GEFanuc GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Embedded Systems, Inc. +gef GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Embedded Systems, Inc. +hp Hewlett Packard +ibm International Business Machines (IBM) +idt Integrated Device Technologies, Inc. +intercontrol Inter Control Group +linux Linux-specific binding +marvell Marvell Technology Group Ltd. +maxim Maxim Integrated Products +mosaixtech Mosaix Technologies, Inc. +national National Semiconductor +nintendo Nintendo +nvidia NVIDIA +nxp NXP Semiconductors +powervr Imagination Technologies +qcom Qualcomm, Inc. +ramtron Ramtron International +samsung Samsung Semiconductor +schindler Schindler +simtek +sirf SiRF Technology, Inc. +stericsson ST-Ericsson +ti Texas Instruments +xlnx Xilinx diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt index f7ec9d625bfc..abfc8e290d53 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt @@ -48,10 +48,6 @@ devclass_add_device is called to enumerate the device within the class and actually register it with the class, which happens with the class's register_dev callback. -NOTE: The device class structures and core routines to manipulate them -are not in the mainline kernel, so the discussion is still a bit -speculative. - Driver ~~~~~~ diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt index bdefe728a737..1e70220d20f4 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt @@ -45,33 +45,52 @@ struct device_attribute { const char *buf, size_t count); }; -Attributes of devices can be exported via drivers using a simple -procfs-like interface. +Attributes of devices can be exported by a device driver through sysfs. Please see Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt for more information on how sysfs works. +As explained in Documentation/kobject.txt, device attributes must be be +created before the KOBJ_ADD uevent is generated. The only way to realize +that is by defining an attribute group. + Attributes are declared using a macro called DEVICE_ATTR: #define DEVICE_ATTR(name,mode,show,store) Example: -DEVICE_ATTR(power,0644,show_power,store_power); +static DEVICE_ATTR(type, 0444, show_type, NULL); +static DEVICE_ATTR(power, 0644, show_power, store_power); -This declares a structure of type struct device_attribute named -'dev_attr_power'. This can then be added and removed to the device's -directory using: +This declares two structures of type struct device_attribute with respective +names 'dev_attr_type' and 'dev_attr_power'. These two attributes can be +organized as follows into a group: -int device_create_file(struct device *device, struct device_attribute * entry); -void device_remove_file(struct device * dev, struct device_attribute * attr); +static struct attribute *dev_attrs[] = { + &dev_attr_type.attr, + &dev_attr_power.attr, + NULL, +}; -Example: +static struct attribute_group dev_attr_group = { + .attrs = dev_attrs, +}; + +static const struct attribute_group *dev_attr_groups[] = { + &dev_attr_group, + NULL, +}; + +This array of groups can then be associated with a device by setting the +group pointer in struct device before device_register() is invoked: -device_create_file(dev,&dev_attr_power); -device_remove_file(dev,&dev_attr_power); + dev->groups = dev_attr_groups; + device_register(dev); -The file name will be 'power' with a mode of 0644 (-rw-r--r--). +The device_register() function will use the 'groups' pointer to create the +device attributes and the device_unregister() function will use this pointer +to remove the device attributes. Word of warning: While the kernel allows device_create_file() and device_remove_file() to be called on a device at any time, userspace has @@ -84,24 +103,4 @@ not know about the new attributes. This is important for device driver that need to publish additional attributes for a device at driver probe time. If the device driver simply calls device_create_file() on the device structure passed to it, then -userspace will never be notified of the new attributes. Instead, it should -probably use class_create() and class->dev_attrs to set up a list of -desired attributes in the modules_init function, and then in the .probe() -hook, and then use device_create() to create a new device as a child -of the probed device. The new device will generate a new uevent and -properly advertise the new attributes to userspace. - -For example, if a driver wanted to add the following attributes: -struct device_attribute mydriver_attribs[] = { - __ATTR(port_count, 0444, port_count_show), - __ATTR(serial_number, 0444, serial_number_show), - NULL -}; - -Then in the module init function is would do: - mydriver_class = class_create(THIS_MODULE, "my_attrs"); - mydriver_class.dev_attr = mydriver_attribs; - -And assuming 'dev' is the struct device passed into the probe hook, the driver -probe function would do something like: - device_create(&mydriver_class, dev, chrdev, &private_data, "my_name"); +userspace will never be notified of the new attributes. diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware index c466f5831f15..e67be7afc78b 100755 --- a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware +++ b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware @@ -27,7 +27,8 @@ use IO::Handle; "or51211", "or51132_qam", "or51132_vsb", "bluebird", "opera1", "cx231xx", "cx18", "cx23885", "pvrusb2", "mpc718", "af9015", "ngene", "az6027", "lme2510_lg", "lme2510c_s7395", - "lme2510c_s7395_old", "drxk", "drxk_terratec_h5"); + "lme2510c_s7395_old", "drxk", "drxk_terratec_h5", "tda10071", + "it9135" ); # Check args syntax() if (scalar(@ARGV) != 1); @@ -575,19 +576,10 @@ sub ngene { } sub az6027{ - my $file = "AZ6027_Linux_Driver.tar.gz"; - my $url = "http://linux.terratec.de/files/$file"; my $firmware = "dvb-usb-az6027-03.fw"; + my $url = "http://linux.terratec.de/files/TERRATEC_S7/$firmware"; - wgetfile($file, $url); - - #untar - if( system("tar xzvf $file $firmware")){ - die "failed to untar firmware"; - } - if( system("rm $file")){ - die ("unable to remove unnecessary files"); - } + wgetfile($firmware, $url); $firmware; } @@ -665,6 +657,41 @@ sub drxk_terratec_h5 { "$fwfile" } +sub it9135 { + my $url = "http://kworld.server261.com/kworld/CD/ITE_TiVme/V1.00/"; + my $zipfile = "Driver_V10.323.1.0412.100412.zip"; + my $hash = "79b597dc648698ed6820845c0c9d0d37"; + my $tmpdir = tempdir(DIR => "/tmp", CLEANUP => 0); + my $drvfile = "Driver_V10.323.1.0412.100412/Data/x86/IT9135BDA.sys"; + my $fwfile = "dvb-usb-it9137-01.fw"; + + checkstandard(); + + wgetfile($zipfile, $url . $zipfile); + verify($zipfile, $hash); + unzip($zipfile, $tmpdir); + extract("$tmpdir/$drvfile", 69632, 5731, "$fwfile"); + + "$fwfile" +} + +sub tda10071 { + my $sourcefile = "PCTV_460e_reference.zip"; + my $url = "ftp://ftp.pctvsystems.com/TV/driver/PCTV%2070e%2080e%20100e%20320e%20330e%20800e/"; + my $hash = "4403de903bf2593464c8d74bbc200a57"; + my $fwfile = "dvb-fe-tda10071.fw"; + my $tmpdir = tempdir(DIR => "/tmp", CLEANUP => 1); + + checkstandard(); + + wgetfile($sourcefile, $url . $sourcefile); + verify($sourcefile, $hash); + unzip($sourcefile, $tmpdir); + extract("$tmpdir/PCTV\ 70e\ 80e\ 100e\ 320e\ 330e\ 800e/32\ bit/emOEM.sys", 0x67d38, 40504, $fwfile); + + "$fwfile"; +} + # --------------------------------------------------------------- # Utilities diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/it9137.txt b/Documentation/dvb/it9137.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9e6726eead90 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/dvb/it9137.txt @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ +To extract firmware for Kworld UB499-2T (id 1b80:e409) you need to copy the +following file(s) to this directory. + +IT9135BDA.sys Dated Mon 22 Mar 2010 02:20:08 GMT + +extract using dd +dd if=IT9135BDA.sys ibs=1 skip=69632 count=5731 of=dvb-usb-it9137-01.fw + +copy to default firmware location. diff --git a/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt b/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt index 82a5d250d75e..ba4be8b77093 100644 --- a/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt +++ b/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt @@ -21,6 +21,11 @@ o fail_make_request /sys/block/<device>/make-it-fail or /sys/block/<device>/<partition>/make-it-fail. (generic_make_request()) +o fail_mmc_request + + injects MMC data errors on devices permitted by setting + debugfs entries under /sys/kernel/debug/mmc0/fail_mmc_request + Configure fault-injection capabilities behavior ----------------------------------------------- @@ -115,7 +120,8 @@ use the boot option: failslab= fail_page_alloc= - fail_make_request=<interval>,<probability>,<space>,<times> + fail_make_request= + mmc_core.fail_request=<interval>,<probability>,<space>,<times> How to add new fault injection capability ----------------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt index 7fdde2a02a27..57d2f2908b12 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt +++ b/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt @@ -87,23 +87,38 @@ Special configuration for udlfb is usually unnecessary. There are a few options, however. From the command line, pass options to modprobe -modprobe udlfb defio=1 console=1 +modprobe udlfb fb_defio=0 console=1 shadow=1 -Or for permanent option, create file like /etc/modprobe.d/options with text -options udlfb defio=1 console=1 +Or modify options on the fly at /sys/module/udlfb/parameters directory via +sudo nano fb_defio +change the parameter in place, and save the file. -Accepted options: +Unplug/replug USB device to apply with new settings + +Or for permanent option, create file like /etc/modprobe.d/udlfb.conf with text +options udlfb fb_defio=0 console=1 shadow=1 + +Accepted boolean options: fb_defio Make use of the fb_defio (CONFIG_FB_DEFERRED_IO) kernel module to track changed areas of the framebuffer by page faults. - Standard fbdev applications that use mmap but that do not - report damage, may be able to work with this enabled. - Disabled by default because of overhead and other issues. - -console Allow fbcon to attach to udlfb provided framebuffers. This - is disabled by default because fbcon will aggressively consume - the first framebuffer it finds, which isn't usually what the - user wants in the case of USB displays. + Standard fbdev applications that use mmap but that do not + report damage, should be able to work with this enabled. + Disable when running with X server that supports reporting + changed regions via ioctl, as this method is simpler, + more stable, and higher performance. + default: fb_defio=1 + +console Allow fbcon to attach to udlfb provided framebuffers. + Can be disabled if fbcon and other clients + (e.g. X with --shared-vt) are in conflict. + default: console=1 + +shadow Allocate a 2nd framebuffer to shadow what's currently across + the USB bus in device memory. If any pixels are unchanged, + do not transmit. Spends host memory to save USB transfers. + Enabled by default. Only disable on very low memory systems. + default: shadow=1 Sysfs Attributes ================ diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index 4dc465477665..7c799fc5b88e 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -495,29 +495,6 @@ Who: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> ---------------------------- -What: Support for UVCIOC_CTRL_ADD in the uvcvideo driver -When: 3.2 -Why: The information passed to the driver by this ioctl is now queried - dynamically from the device. -Who: Laurent Pinchart <laurent.pinchart@ideasonboard.com> - ----------------------------- - -What: Support for UVCIOC_CTRL_MAP_OLD in the uvcvideo driver -When: 3.2 -Why: Used only by applications compiled against older driver versions. - Superseded by UVCIOC_CTRL_MAP which supports V4L2 menu controls. -Who: Laurent Pinchart <laurent.pinchart@ideasonboard.com> - ----------------------------- - -What: Support for UVCIOC_CTRL_GET and UVCIOC_CTRL_SET in the uvcvideo driver -When: 3.2 -Why: Superseded by the UVCIOC_CTRL_QUERY ioctl. -Who: Laurent Pinchart <laurent.pinchart@ideasonboard.com> - ----------------------------- - What: Support for driver specific ioctls in the pwc driver (everything defined in media/pwc-ioctl.h) When: 3.3 @@ -594,9 +571,18 @@ Why: In 3.0, we can now autodetect internal 3G device and already have Who: Lee, Chun-Yi <jlee@novell.com> ---------------------------- + What: The XFS nodelaylog mount option When: 3.3 Why: The delaylog mode that has been the default since 2.6.39 has proven stable, and the old code is in the way of additional improvements in the log code. Who: Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de> + +---------------------------- + +What: iwlagn alias support +When: 3.5 +Why: The iwlagn module has been renamed iwlwifi. The alias will be around + for backward compatibility for several cycles and then dropped. +Who: Don Fry <donald.h.fry@intel.com> diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt index 13de64c7f0ab..2c0321442845 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ OPTIONS wfdno=n the file descriptor for writing with trans=fd - maxdata=n the number of bytes to use for 9p packet payload (msize) + msize=n the number of bytes to use for 9p packet payload port=n port to connect to on the remote server diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/object.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/object.txt index e8b0a35d8fe5..58313348da87 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/object.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/object.txt @@ -127,9 +127,9 @@ fscache_enqueue_object()). PROVISION OF CPU TIME --------------------- -The work to be done by the various states is given CPU time by the threads of -the slow work facility (see Documentation/slow-work.txt). This is used in -preference to the workqueue facility because: +The work to be done by the various states was given CPU time by the threads of +the slow work facility. This was used in preference to the workqueue facility +because: (1) Threads may be completely occupied for very long periods of time by a particular work item. These state actions may be doing sequences of diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/locks.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/locks.txt index fab857accbd6..2cf81082581d 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/locks.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/locks.txt @@ -53,11 +53,12 @@ fcntl(), with all the problems that implies. 1.3 Mandatory Locking As A Mount Option --------------------------------------- -Mandatory locking, as described in 'Documentation/filesystems/mandatory.txt' -was prior to this release a general configuration option that was valid for -all mounted filesystems. This had a number of inherent dangers, not the -least of which was the ability to freeze an NFS server by asking it to read -a file for which a mandatory lock existed. +Mandatory locking, as described in +'Documentation/filesystems/mandatory-locking.txt' was prior to this release a +general configuration option that was valid for all mounted filesystems. This +had a number of inherent dangers, not the least of which was the ability to +freeze an NFS server by asking it to read a file for which a mandatory lock +existed. From this release of the kernel, mandatory locking can be turned on and off on a per-filesystem basis, using the mount options 'mand' and 'nomand'. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt index 9c8fd6148656..120fd3cf7fd9 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ request-key will find the first matching line and corresponding program. In this case, /some/other/program will handle all uid lookups and /usr/sbin/nfs.idmap will handle gid, user, and group lookups. -See <file:Documentation/security/keys-request-keys.txt> for more information +See <file:Documentation/security/keys-request-key.txt> for more information about the request-key function. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/design_notes.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/design_notes.txt index dcf833587162..8aef91335701 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/design_notes.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/design_notes.txt @@ -58,8 +58,9 @@ data transfers. POHMELFS clients operate with a working set of servers and are capable of balancing read-only operations (like lookups or directory listings) between them according to IO priorities. Administrators can add or remove servers from the set at run-time via special commands (described -in Documentation/pohmelfs/info.txt file). Writes are replicated to all servers, which are connected -with write permission turned on. IO priority and permissions can be changed in run-time. +in Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/info.txt file). Writes are replicated to all servers, which +are connected with write permission turned on. IO priority and permissions can be changed in +run-time. POHMELFS is capable of full data channel encryption and/or strong crypto hashing. One can select any kernel supported cipher, encryption mode, hash type and operation mode diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index db3b1aba32a3..0ec91f03422e 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -1263,7 +1263,7 @@ review the kernel documentation in the directory /usr/src/linux/Documentation. This chapter is heavily based on the documentation included in the pre 2.2 kernels, and became part of it in version 2.2.1 of the Linux kernel. -Please see: Documentation/sysctls/ directory for descriptions of these +Please see: Documentation/sysctl/ directory for descriptions of these entries. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt index 597f728e7b4e..07235caec22c 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ sysfs - _The_ filesystem for exporting kernel objects. Patrick Mochel <mochel@osdl.org> Mike Murphy <mamurph@cs.clemson.edu> -Revised: 15 July 2010 +Revised: 16 August 2011 Original: 10 January 2003 @@ -370,3 +370,11 @@ int driver_create_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *); void driver_remove_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *); +Documentation +~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The sysfs directory structure and the attributes in each directory define an +ABI between the kernel and user space. As for any ABI, it is important that +this ABI is stable and properly documented. All new sysfs attributes must be +documented in Documentation/ABI. See also Documentation/ABI/README for more +information. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index 52d8fb81cfff..43cbd0821721 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt @@ -1053,9 +1053,6 @@ manipulate dentries: and the dentry is returned. The caller must use dput() to free the dentry when it finishes using it. -For further information on dentry locking, please refer to the document -Documentation/filesystems/dentry-locking.txt. - Mount Options ============= diff --git a/Documentation/frv/booting.txt b/Documentation/frv/booting.txt index 37c4d84a0e57..9bdf4b46e741 100644 --- a/Documentation/frv/booting.txt +++ b/Documentation/frv/booting.txt @@ -180,9 +180,3 @@ separated by spaces: This tells the kernel what program to run initially. By default this is /sbin/init, but /sbin/sash or /bin/sh are common alternatives. - - (*) vdc=... - - This option configures the MB93493 companion chip visual display - driver. Please see Documentation/frv/mb93493/vdc.txt for more - information. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ad7314 b/Documentation/hwmon/ad7314 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1912549c7467 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ad7314 @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +Kernel driver ad7314 +==================== + +Supported chips: + * Analog Devices AD7314 + Prefix: 'ad7314' + Datasheet: Publicly available at Analog Devices website. + * Analog Devices ADT7301 + Prefix: 'adt7301' + Datasheet: Publicly available at Analog Devices website. + * Analog Devices ADT7302 + Prefix: 'adt7302' + Datasheet: Publicly available at Analog Devices website. + +Description +----------- + +Driver supports the above parts. The ad7314 has a 10 bit +sensor with 1lsb = 0.25 degrees centigrade. The adt7301 and +adt7302 have 14 bit sensors with 1lsb = 0.03125 degrees centigrade. + +Notes +----- + +Currently power down mode is not supported. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 index 097b3ccc4be7..ab70d96d2dfd 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 @@ -6,6 +6,10 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'adm1275' Addresses scanned: - Datasheet: www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADM1275.pdf + * Analog Devices ADM1276 + Prefix: 'adm1276' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADM1276.pdf Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> @@ -13,13 +17,13 @@ Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> Description ----------- -This driver supports hardware montoring for Analog Devices ADM1275 Hot-Swap -Controller and Digital Power Monitor. +This driver supports hardware montoring for Analog Devices ADM1275 and ADM1276 +Hot-Swap Controller and Digital Power Monitor. -The ADM1275 is a hot-swap controller that allows a circuit board to be removed -from or inserted into a live backplane. It also features current and voltage -readback via an integrated 12-bit analog-to-digital converter (ADC), accessed -using a PMBus. interface. +ADM1275 and ADM1276 are hot-swap controllers that allow a circuit board to be +removed from or inserted into a live backplane. They also feature current and +voltage readback via an integrated 12-bit analog-to-digital converter (ADC), +accessed using a PMBus interface. The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers. @@ -48,17 +52,25 @@ attributes are write-only, all other attributes are read-only. in1_label "vin1" or "vout1" depending on chip variant and configuration. -in1_input Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register. -in1_min Minumum Voltage. From VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register. -in1_max Maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register. -in1_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status. -in1_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status. +in1_input Measured voltage. +in1_min Minumum Voltage. +in1_max Maximum voltage. +in1_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. +in1_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. in1_highest Historical maximum voltage. in1_reset_history Write any value to reset history. curr1_label "iout1" -curr1_input Measured current. From READ_IOUT register. -curr1_max Maximum current. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. -curr1_max_alarm Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. +curr1_input Measured current. +curr1_max Maximum current. +curr1_max_alarm Current high alarm. +curr1_lcrit Critical minimum current. Depending on the chip + configuration, either curr1_lcrit or curr1_crit is + supported, but not both. +curr1_lcrit_alarm Critical current low alarm. +curr1_crit Critical maximum current. Depending on the chip + configuration, either curr1_lcrit or curr1_crit is + supported, but not both. +curr1_crit_alarm Critical current high alarm. curr1_highest Historical maximum current. curr1_reset_history Write any value to reset history. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/exynos4_tmu b/Documentation/hwmon/exynos4_tmu new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c3c6b41db607 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/exynos4_tmu @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +Kernel driver exynos4_tmu +================= + +Supported chips: +* ARM SAMSUNG EXYNOS4 series of SoC + Prefix: 'exynos4-tmu' + Datasheet: Not publicly available + +Authors: Donggeun Kim <dg77.kim@samsung.com> + +Description +----------- + +This driver allows to read temperature inside SAMSUNG EXYNOS4 series of SoC. + +The chip only exposes the measured 8-bit temperature code value +through a register. +Temperature can be taken from the temperature code. +There are three equations converting from temperature to temperature code. + +The three equations are: + 1. Two point trimming + Tc = (T - 25) * (TI2 - TI1) / (85 - 25) + TI1 + + 2. One point trimming + Tc = T + TI1 - 25 + + 3. No trimming + Tc = T + 50 + + Tc: Temperature code, T: Temperature, + TI1: Trimming info for 25 degree Celsius (stored at TRIMINFO register) + Temperature code measured at 25 degree Celsius which is unchanged + TI2: Trimming info for 85 degree Celsius (stored at TRIMINFO register) + Temperature code measured at 85 degree Celsius which is unchanged + +TMU(Thermal Management Unit) in EXYNOS4 generates interrupt +when temperature exceeds pre-defined levels. +The maximum number of configurable threshold is four. +The threshold levels are defined as follows: + Level_0: current temperature > trigger_level_0 + threshold + Level_1: current temperature > trigger_level_1 + threshold + Level_2: current temperature > trigger_level_2 + threshold + Level_3: current temperature > trigger_level_3 + threshold + + The threshold and each trigger_level are set + through the corresponding registers. + +When an interrupt occurs, this driver notify user space of +one of four threshold levels for the interrupt +through kobject_uevent_env and sysfs_notify functions. +Although an interrupt condition for level_0 can be set, +it is not notified to user space through sysfs_notify function. + +Sysfs Interface +--------------- +name name of the temperature sensor + RO + +temp1_input temperature + RO + +temp1_max temperature for level_1 interrupt + RO + +temp1_crit temperature for level_2 interrupt + RO + +temp1_emergency temperature for level_3 interrupt + RO + +temp1_max_alarm alarm for level_1 interrupt + RO + +temp1_crit_alarm + alarm for level_2 interrupt + RO + +temp1_emergency_alarm + alarm for level_3 interrupt + RO diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 index a1790401fdde..c91a1d15fa28 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 @@ -12,26 +12,46 @@ Supported chips: Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website http://www.national.com/ - * Dallas Semiconductor DS75 - Prefix: 'lm75' - Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f - Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website - http://www.maxim-ic.com/ - * Dallas Semiconductor DS1775 - Prefix: 'lm75' - Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f + * Dallas Semiconductor DS75, DS1775 + Prefixes: 'ds75', 'ds1775' + Addresses scanned: none Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website http://www.maxim-ic.com/ * Maxim MAX6625, MAX6626 - Prefix: 'lm75' - Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4b + Prefixes: 'max6625', 'max6626' + Addresses scanned: none Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website http://www.maxim-ic.com/ * Microchip (TelCom) TCN75 Prefix: 'lm75' - Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f + Addresses scanned: none + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Microchip website + http://www.microchip.com/ + * Microchip MCP9800, MCP9801, MCP9802, MCP9803 + Prefix: 'mcp980x' + Addresses scanned: none Datasheet: Publicly available at the Microchip website http://www.microchip.com/ + * Analog Devices ADT75 + Prefix: 'adt75' + Addresses scanned: none + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website + http://www.analog.com/adt75 + * ST Microelectronics STDS75 + Prefix: 'stds75' + Addresses scanned: none + Datasheet: Publicly available at the ST website + http://www.st.com/internet/analog/product/121769.jsp + * Texas Instruments TMP100, TMP101, TMP105, TMP75, TMP175, TMP275 + Prefixes: 'tmp100', 'tmp101', 'tmp105', 'tmp175', 'tmp75', 'tmp275' + Addresses scanned: none + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website + http://www.ti.com/product/tmp100 + http://www.ti.com/product/tmp101 + http://www.ti.com/product/tmp105 + http://www.ti.com/product/tmp75 + http://www.ti.com/product/tmp175 + http://www.ti.com/product/tmp275 Author: Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl> @@ -50,21 +70,16 @@ range of -55 to +125 degrees. The LM75 only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often will do no harm, but will return 'old' values. -The LM75 is usually used in combination with LM78-like chips, to measure -the temperature of the processor(s). - -The DS75, DS1775, MAX6625, and MAX6626 are supported as well. -They are not distinguished from an LM75. While most of these chips -have three additional bits of accuracy (12 vs. 9 for the LM75), -the additional bits are not supported. Not only that, but these chips will -not be detected if not in 9-bit precision mode (use the force parameter if -needed). - -The TCN75 is supported as well, and is not distinguished from an LM75. +The original LM75 was typically used in combination with LM78-like chips +on PC motherboards, to measure the temperature of the processor(s). Clones +are now used in various embedded designs. The LM75 is essentially an industry standard; there may be other LM75 clones not listed here, with or without various enhancements, -that are supported. +that are supported. The clones are not detected by the driver, unless +they reproduce the exact register tricks of the original LM75, and must +therefore be instantiated explicitly. The specific enhancements (such as +higher resolution) are not currently supported by the driver. The LM77 is not supported, contrary to what we pretended for a long time. Both chips are simply not compatible, value encoding differs. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c365f9beb5dd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +Kernel driver ltc2978 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Linear Technology LTC2978 + Prefix: 'ltc2978' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/2978fa.pdf + * Linear Technology LTC3880 + Prefix: 'ltc3880' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/3880f.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +The LTC2978 is an octal power supply monitor, supervisor, sequencer and +margin controller. The LTC3880 is a dual, PolyPhase DC/DC synchronous +step-down switching regulator controller. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not probe for PMBus devices. You will have to instantiate +devices explicitly. + +Example: the following commands will load the driver for an LTC2978 at address +0x60 on I2C bus #1: + +# modprobe ltc2978 +# echo ltc2978 0x60 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device + + +Sysfs attributes +---------------- + +in1_label "vin" +in1_input Measured input voltage. +in1_min Minimum input voltage. +in1_max Maximum input voltage. +in1_lcrit Critical minimum input voltage. +in1_crit Critical maximum input voltage. +in1_min_alarm Input voltage low alarm. +in1_max_alarm Input voltage high alarm. +in1_lcrit_alarm Input voltage critical low alarm. +in1_crit_alarm Input voltage critical high alarm. +in1_lowest Lowest input voltage. LTC2978 only. +in1_highest Highest input voltage. +in1_reset_history Reset history. Writing into this attribute will reset + history for all attributes. + +in[2-9]_label "vout[1-8]". Channels 3 to 9 on LTC2978 only. +in[2-9]_input Measured output voltage. +in[2-9]_min Minimum output voltage. +in[2-9]_max Maximum output voltage. +in[2-9]_lcrit Critical minimum output voltage. +in[2-9]_crit Critical maximum output voltage. +in[2-9]_min_alarm Output voltage low alarm. +in[2-9]_max_alarm Output voltage high alarm. +in[2-9]_lcrit_alarm Output voltage critical low alarm. +in[2-9]_crit_alarm Output voltage critical high alarm. +in[2-9]_lowest Lowest output voltage. LTC2978 only. +in[2-9]_highest Lowest output voltage. +in[2-9]_reset_history Reset history. Writing into this attribute will reset + history for all attributes. + +temp[1-3]_input Measured temperature. + On LTC2978, only one temperature measurement is + supported and reflects the internal temperature. + On LTC3880, temp1 and temp2 report external + temperatures, and temp3 reports the internal + temperature. +temp[1-3]_min Mimimum temperature. +temp[1-3]_max Maximum temperature. +temp[1-3]_lcrit Critical low temperature. +temp[1-3]_crit Critical high temperature. +temp[1-3]_min_alarm Chip temperature low alarm. +temp[1-3]_max_alarm Chip temperature high alarm. +temp[1-3]_lcrit_alarm Chip temperature critical low alarm. +temp[1-3]_crit_alarm Chip temperature critical high alarm. +temp[1-3]_lowest Lowest measured temperature. LTC2978 only. +temp[1-3]_highest Highest measured temperature. +temp[1-3]_reset_history Reset history. Writing into this attribute will reset + history for all attributes. + +power[1-2]_label "pout[1-2]". LTC3880 only. +power[1-2]_input Measured power. + +curr1_label "iin". LTC3880 only. +curr1_input Measured input current. +curr1_max Maximum input current. +curr1_max_alarm Input current high alarm. + +curr[2-3]_label "iout[1-2]". LTC3880 only. +curr[2-3]_input Measured input current. +curr[2-3]_max Maximum input current. +curr[2-3]_crit Critical input current. +curr[2-3]_max_alarm Input current high alarm. +curr[2-3]_crit_alarm Input current critical high alarm. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus index c36c1c1a62bb..15ac911ce51b 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus @@ -8,11 +8,6 @@ Supported chips: Addresses scanned: - Datasheet: http://archive.ericsson.net/service/internet/picov/get?DocNo=28701-EN/LZT146395 - * Linear Technology LTC2978 - Octal PMBus Power Supply Monitor and Controller - Prefix: 'ltc2978' - Addresses scanned: - - Datasheet: http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/2978fa.pdf * ON Semiconductor ADP4000, NCP4200, NCP4208 Prefixes: 'adp4000', 'ncp4200', 'ncp4208' Addresses scanned: - @@ -20,6 +15,14 @@ Supported chips: http://www.onsemi.com/pub_link/Collateral/ADP4000-D.PDF http://www.onsemi.com/pub_link/Collateral/NCP4200-D.PDF http://www.onsemi.com/pub_link/Collateral/JUNE%202009-%20REV.%200.PDF + * Lineage Power + Prefixes: 'pdt003', 'pdt006', 'pdt012', 'udt020' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheets: + http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/PDT003A0X.pdf + http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/PDT006A0X.pdf + http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/PDT012A0X.pdf + http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/UDT020A0X.pdf * Generic PMBus devices Prefix: 'pmbus' Addresses scanned: - diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus-core b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus-core new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..31e4720fed18 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus-core @@ -0,0 +1,283 @@ +PMBus core driver and internal API +================================== + +Introduction +============ + +[from pmbus.org] The Power Management Bus (PMBus) is an open standard +power-management protocol with a fully defined command language that facilitates +communication with power converters and other devices in a power system. The +protocol is implemented over the industry-standard SMBus serial interface and +enables programming, control, and real-time monitoring of compliant power +conversion products. This flexible and highly versatile standard allows for +communication between devices based on both analog and digital technologies, and +provides true interoperability which will reduce design complexity and shorten +time to market for power system designers. Pioneered by leading power supply and +semiconductor companies, this open power system standard is maintained and +promoted by the PMBus Implementers Forum (PMBus-IF), comprising 30+ adopters +with the objective to provide support to, and facilitate adoption among, users. + +Unfortunately, while PMBus commands are standardized, there are no mandatory +commands, and manufacturers can add as many non-standard commands as they like. +Also, different PMBUs devices act differently if non-supported commands are +executed. Some devices return an error, some devices return 0xff or 0xffff and +set a status error flag, and some devices may simply hang up. + +Despite all those difficulties, a generic PMBus device driver is still useful +and supported since kernel version 2.6.39. However, it was necessary to support +device specific extensions in addition to the core PMBus driver, since it is +simply unknown what new device specific functionality PMBus device developers +come up with next. + +To make device specific extensions as scalable as possible, and to avoid having +to modify the core PMBus driver repeatedly for new devices, the PMBus driver was +split into core, generic, and device specific code. The core code (in +pmbus_core.c) provides generic functionality. The generic code (in pmbus.c) +provides support for generic PMBus devices. Device specific code is responsible +for device specific initialization and, if needed, maps device specific +functionality into generic functionality. This is to some degree comparable +to PCI code, where generic code is augmented as needed with quirks for all kinds +of devices. + +PMBus device capabilities auto-detection +======================================== + +For generic PMBus devices, code in pmbus.c attempts to auto-detect all supported +PMBus commands. Auto-detection is somewhat limited, since there are simply too +many variables to consider. For example, it is almost impossible to autodetect +which PMBus commands are paged and which commands are replicated across all +pages (see the PMBus specification for details on multi-page PMBus devices). + +For this reason, it often makes sense to provide a device specific driver if not +all commands can be auto-detected. The data structures in this driver can be +used to inform the core driver about functionality supported by individual +chips. + +Some commands are always auto-detected. This applies to all limit commands +(lcrit, min, max, and crit attributes) as well as associated alarm attributes. +Limits and alarm attributes are auto-detected because there are simply too many +possible combinations to provide a manual configuration interface. + +PMBus internal API +================== + +The API between core and device specific PMBus code is defined in +drivers/hwmon/pmbus/pmbus.h. In addition to the internal API, pmbus.h defines +standard PMBus commands and virtual PMBus commands. + +Standard PMBus commands +----------------------- + +Standard PMBus commands (commands values 0x00 to 0xff) are defined in the PMBUs +specification. + +Virtual PMBus commands +---------------------- + +Virtual PMBus commands are provided to enable support for non-standard +functionality which has been implemented by several chip vendors and is thus +desirable to support. + +Virtual PMBus commands start with command value 0x100 and can thus easily be +distinguished from standard PMBus commands (which can not have values larger +than 0xff). Support for virtual PMBus commands is device specific and thus has +to be implemented in device specific code. + +Virtual commands are named PMBUS_VIRT_xxx and start with PMBUS_VIRT_BASE. All +virtual commands are word sized. + +There are currently two types of virtual commands. + +- READ commands are read-only; writes are either ignored or return an error. +- RESET commands are read/write. Reading reset registers returns zero + (used for detection), writing any value causes the associated history to be + reset. + +Virtual commands have to be handled in device specific driver code. Chip driver +code returns non-negative values if a virtual command is supported, or a +negative error code if not. The chip driver may return -ENODATA or any other +Linux error code in this case, though an error code other than -ENODATA is +handled more efficiently and thus preferred. Either case, the calling PMBus +core code will abort if the chip driver returns an error code when reading +or writing virtual registers (in other words, the PMBus core code will never +send a virtual command to a chip). + +PMBus driver information +------------------------ + +PMBus driver information, defined in struct pmbus_driver_info, is the main means +for device specific drivers to pass information to the core PMBus driver. +Specifically, it provides the following information. + +- For devices supporting its data in Direct Data Format, it provides coefficients + for converting register values into normalized data. This data is usually + provided by chip manufacturers in device datasheets. +- Supported chip functionality can be provided to the core driver. This may be + necessary for chips which react badly if non-supported commands are executed, + and/or to speed up device detection and initialization. +- Several function entry points are provided to support overriding and/or + augmenting generic command execution. This functionality can be used to map + non-standard PMBus commands to standard commands, or to augment standard + command return values with device specific information. + + API functions + ------------- + + Functions provided by chip driver + --------------------------------- + + All functions return the command return value (read) or zero (write) if + successful. A return value of -ENODATA indicates that there is no manufacturer + specific command, but that a standard PMBus command may exist. Any other + negative return value indicates that the commands does not exist for this + chip, and that no attempt should be made to read or write the standard + command. + + As mentioned above, an exception to this rule applies to virtual commands, + which _must_ be handled in driver specific code. See "Virtual PMBus Commands" + above for more details. + + Command execution in the core PMBus driver code is as follows. + + if (chip_access_function) { + status = chip_access_function(); + if (status != -ENODATA) + return status; + } + if (command >= PMBUS_VIRT_BASE) /* For word commands/registers only */ + return -EINVAL; + return generic_access(); + + Chip drivers may provide pointers to the following functions in struct + pmbus_driver_info. All functions are optional. + + int (*read_byte_data)(struct i2c_client *client, int page, int reg); + + Read byte from page <page>, register <reg>. + <page> may be -1, which means "current page". + + int (*read_word_data)(struct i2c_client *client, int page, int reg); + + Read word from page <page>, register <reg>. + + int (*write_word_data)(struct i2c_client *client, int page, int reg, + u16 word); + + Write word to page <page>, register <reg>. + + int (*write_byte)(struct i2c_client *client, int page, u8 value); + + Write byte to page <page>, register <reg>. + <page> may be -1, which means "current page". + + int (*identify)(struct i2c_client *client, struct pmbus_driver_info *info); + + Determine supported PMBus functionality. This function is only necessary + if a chip driver supports multiple chips, and the chip functionality is not + pre-determined. It is currently only used by the generic pmbus driver + (pmbus.c). + + Functions exported by core driver + --------------------------------- + + Chip drivers are expected to use the following functions to read or write + PMBus registers. Chip drivers may also use direct I2C commands. If direct I2C + commands are used, the chip driver code must not directly modify the current + page, since the selected page is cached in the core driver and the core driver + will assume that it is selected. Using pmbus_set_page() to select a new page + is mandatory. + + int pmbus_set_page(struct i2c_client *client, u8 page); + + Set PMBus page register to <page> for subsequent commands. + + int pmbus_read_word_data(struct i2c_client *client, u8 page, u8 reg); + + Read word data from <page>, <reg>. Similar to i2c_smbus_read_word_data(), but + selects page first. + + int pmbus_write_word_data(struct i2c_client *client, u8 page, u8 reg, + u16 word); + + Write word data to <page>, <reg>. Similar to i2c_smbus_write_word_data(), but + selects page first. + + int pmbus_read_byte_data(struct i2c_client *client, int page, u8 reg); + + Read byte data from <page>, <reg>. Similar to i2c_smbus_read_byte_data(), but + selects page first. <page> may be -1, which means "current page". + + int pmbus_write_byte(struct i2c_client *client, int page, u8 value); + + Write byte data to <page>, <reg>. Similar to i2c_smbus_write_byte(), but + selects page first. <page> may be -1, which means "current page". + + void pmbus_clear_faults(struct i2c_client *client); + + Execute PMBus "Clear Fault" command on all chip pages. + This function calls the device specific write_byte function if defined. + Therefore, it must _not_ be called from that function. + + bool pmbus_check_byte_register(struct i2c_client *client, int page, int reg); + + Check if byte register exists. Return true if the register exists, false + otherwise. + This function calls the device specific write_byte function if defined to + obtain the chip status. Therefore, it must _not_ be called from that function. + + bool pmbus_check_word_register(struct i2c_client *client, int page, int reg); + + Check if word register exists. Return true if the register exists, false + otherwise. + This function calls the device specific write_byte function if defined to + obtain the chip status. Therefore, it must _not_ be called from that function. + + int pmbus_do_probe(struct i2c_client *client, const struct i2c_device_id *id, + struct pmbus_driver_info *info); + + Execute probe function. Similar to standard probe function for other drivers, + with the pointer to struct pmbus_driver_info as additional argument. Calls + identify function if supported. Must only be called from device probe + function. + + void pmbus_do_remove(struct i2c_client *client); + + Execute driver remove function. Similar to standard driver remove function. + + const struct pmbus_driver_info + *pmbus_get_driver_info(struct i2c_client *client); + + Return pointer to struct pmbus_driver_info as passed to pmbus_do_probe(). + + +PMBus driver platform data +========================== + +PMBus platform data is defined in include/linux/i2c/pmbus.h. Platform data +currently only provides a flag field with a single bit used. + +#define PMBUS_SKIP_STATUS_CHECK (1 << 0) + +struct pmbus_platform_data { + u32 flags; /* Device specific flags */ +}; + + +Flags +----- + +PMBUS_SKIP_STATUS_CHECK + +During register detection, skip checking the status register for +communication or command errors. + +Some PMBus chips respond with valid data when trying to read an unsupported +register. For such chips, checking the status register is mandatory when +trying to determine if a chip register exists or not. +Other PMBus chips don't support the STATUS_CML register, or report +communication errors for no explicable reason. For such chips, checking the +status register must be disabled. + +Some i2c controllers do not support single-byte commands (write commands with +no data, i2c_smbus_write_byte()). With such controllers, clearing the status +register is impossible, and the PMBUS_SKIP_STATUS_CHECK flag must be set. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/zl6100 b/Documentation/hwmon/zl6100 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7617798b5c97 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/zl6100 @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ +Kernel driver zl6100 +==================== + +Supported chips: + * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2004 + Prefix: 'zl2004' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6847.pdf + * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2006 + Prefix: 'zl2006' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6850.pdf + * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2008 + Prefix: 'zl2008' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6859.pdf + * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2105 + Prefix: 'zl2105' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6851.pdf + * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2106 + Prefix: 'zl2106' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6852.pdf + * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL6100 + Prefix: 'zl6100' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6876.pdf + * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL6105 + Prefix: 'zl6105' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6906.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver supports hardware montoring for Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL6100 and +compatible digital DC-DC controllers. + +The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see +Documentation/hwmon/pmbus and Documentation.hwmon/pmbus-core for details +on PMBus client drivers. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not auto-detect devices. You will have to instantiate the +devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for +details. + +WARNING: Do not access chip registers using the i2cdump command, and do not use +any of the i2ctools commands on a command register used to save and restore +configuration data (0x11, 0x12, 0x15, 0x16, and 0xf4). The chips supported by +this driver interpret any access to those command registers (including read +commands) as request to execute the command in question. Unless write accesses +to those registers are protected, this may result in power loss, board resets, +and/or Flash corruption. Worst case, your board may turn into a brick. + + +Platform data support +--------------------- + +The driver supports standard PMBus driver platform data. + + +Module parameters +----------------- + +delay +----- + +Some Intersil/Zilker Labs DC-DC controllers require a minimum interval between +I2C bus accesses. According to Intersil, the minimum interval is 2 ms, though +1 ms appears to be sufficient and has not caused any problems in testing. +The problem is known to affect ZL6100, ZL2105, and ZL2008. It is known not to +affect ZL2004 and ZL6105. The driver automatically sets the interval to 1 ms +except for ZL2004 and ZL6105. To enable manual override, the driver provides a +writeable module parameter, 'delay', which can be used to set the interval to +a value between 0 and 65,535 microseconds. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other +attributes are read-only. + +in1_label "vin" +in1_input Measured input voltage. +in1_min Minimum input voltage. +in1_max Maximum input voltage. +in1_lcrit Critical minumum input voltage. +in1_crit Critical maximum input voltage. +in1_min_alarm Input voltage low alarm. +in1_max_alarm Input voltage high alarm. +in1_lcrit_alarm Input voltage critical low alarm. +in1_crit_alarm Input voltage critical high alarm. + +in2_label "vout1" +in2_input Measured output voltage. +in2_lcrit Critical minumum output Voltage. +in2_crit Critical maximum output voltage. +in2_lcrit_alarm Critical output voltage critical low alarm. +in2_crit_alarm Critical output voltage critical high alarm. + +curr1_label "iout1" +curr1_input Measured output current. +curr1_lcrit Critical minimum output current. +curr1_crit Critical maximum output current. +curr1_lcrit_alarm Output current critical low alarm. +curr1_crit_alarm Output current critical high alarm. + +temp[12]_input Measured temperature. +temp[12]_min Minimum temperature. +temp[12]_max Maximum temperature. +temp[12]_lcrit Critical low temperature. +temp[12]_crit Critical high temperature. +temp[12]_min_alarm Chip temperature low alarm. +temp[12]_max_alarm Chip temperature high alarm. +temp[12]_lcrit_alarm Chip temperature critical low alarm. +temp[12]_crit_alarm Chip temperature critical high alarm. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol b/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol index 7c19d1a2bea0..49f5b680809d 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol +++ b/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol @@ -88,6 +88,10 @@ byte. But this time, the data is a complete word (16 bits). S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] S Addr Rd [A] [DataLow] A [DataHigh] NA P +Note the convenience function i2c_smbus_read_word_swapped is +available for reads where the two data bytes are the other way +around (not SMBus compliant, but very popular.) + SMBus Write Byte: i2c_smbus_write_byte_data() ============================================== @@ -108,6 +112,10 @@ specified through the Comm byte. S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] DataLow [A] DataHigh [A] P +Note the convenience function i2c_smbus_write_word_swapped is +available for writes where the two data bytes are the other way +around (not SMBus compliant, but very popular.) + SMBus Process Call: i2c_smbus_process_call() ============================================= diff --git a/Documentation/input/elantech.txt b/Documentation/input/elantech.txt index db798af5ef98..5602eb71ad5d 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/elantech.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/elantech.txt @@ -16,15 +16,28 @@ Contents 1. Introduction 2. Extra knobs - 3. Hardware version 1 - 3.1 Registers - 3.2 Native relative mode 4 byte packet format - 3.3 Native absolute mode 4 byte packet format - 4. Hardware version 2 + 3. Differentiating hardware versions + 4. Hardware version 1 4.1 Registers - 4.2 Native absolute mode 6 byte packet format - 4.2.1 One finger touch - 4.2.2 Two finger touch + 4.2 Native relative mode 4 byte packet format + 4.3 Native absolute mode 4 byte packet format + 5. Hardware version 2 + 5.1 Registers + 5.2 Native absolute mode 6 byte packet format + 5.2.1 Parity checking and packet re-synchronization + 5.2.2 One/Three finger touch + 5.2.3 Two finger touch + 6. Hardware version 3 + 6.1 Registers + 6.2 Native absolute mode 6 byte packet format + 6.2.1 One/Three finger touch + 6.2.2 Two finger touch + 7. Hardware version 4 + 7.1 Registers + 7.2 Native absolute mode 6 byte packet format + 7.2.1 Status packet + 7.2.2 Head packet + 7.2.3 Motion packet @@ -375,7 +388,7 @@ For all the other ones, there are just a few constant bits: In case an error is detected, all the packets are shifted by one (and packet[0] is discarded). -5.2.1 One/Three finger touch +5.2.2 One/Three finger touch ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ byte 0: @@ -384,19 +397,19 @@ byte 0: n1 n0 w3 w2 . . R L L, R = 1 when Left, Right mouse button pressed - n1..n0 = numbers of fingers on touchpad + n1..n0 = number of fingers on touchpad byte 1: bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - p7 p6 p5 p4 . x10 x9 x8 + p7 p6 p5 p4 x11 x10 x9 x8 byte 2: bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x7 x6 x5 x4 x3 x2 x1 x0 - x10..x0 = absolute x value (horizontal) + x11..x0 = absolute x value (horizontal) byte 3: @@ -420,7 +433,7 @@ byte 3: byte 4: bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - p3 p1 p2 p0 . . y9 y8 + p3 p1 p2 p0 y11 y10 y9 y8 p7..p0 = pressure (not EF113) @@ -429,10 +442,10 @@ byte 5: bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 y7 y6 y5 y4 y3 y2 y1 y0 - y9..y0 = absolute y value (vertical) + y11..y0 = absolute y value (vertical) -4.2.2 Two finger touch +5.2.3 Two finger touch ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Note that the two pairs of coordinates are not exactly the coordinates of the @@ -446,7 +459,7 @@ byte 0: n1 n0 ay8 ax8 . . R L L, R = 1 when Left, Right mouse button pressed - n1..n0 = numbers of fingers on touchpad + n1..n0 = number of fingers on touchpad byte 1: @@ -480,3 +493,253 @@ byte 5: by7 by8 by5 by4 by3 by2 by1 by0 by8..by0 = upper-right finger absolute y value + +///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// + +6. Hardware version 3 + ================== + +6.1 Registers + ~~~~~~~~~ +* reg_10 + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A + + A: 1 = enable absolute tracking + +6.2 Native absolute mode 6 byte packet format + ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +1 and 3 finger touch shares the same 6-byte packet format, except that +3 finger touch only reports the position of the center of all three fingers. + +Firmware would send 12 bytes of data for 2 finger touch. + +Note on debounce: +In case the box has unstable power supply or other electricity issues, or +when number of finger changes, F/W would send "debounce packet" to inform +driver that the hardware is in debounce status. +The debouce packet has the following signature: + byte 0: 0xc4 + byte 1: 0xff + byte 2: 0xff + byte 3: 0x02 + byte 4: 0xff + byte 5: 0xff +When we encounter this kind of packet, we just ignore it. + +6.2.1 One/Three finger touch + ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +byte 0: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + n1 n0 w3 w2 0 1 R L + + L, R = 1 when Left, Right mouse button pressed + n1..n0 = number of fingers on touchpad + +byte 1: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + p7 p6 p5 p4 x11 x10 x9 x8 + +byte 2: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + x7 x6 x5 x4 x3 x2 x1 x0 + + x11..x0 = absolute x value (horizontal) + +byte 3: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + 0 0 w1 w0 0 0 1 0 + + w3..w0 = width of the finger touch + +byte 4: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + p3 p1 p2 p0 y11 y10 y9 y8 + + p7..p0 = pressure + +byte 5: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + y7 y6 y5 y4 y3 y2 y1 y0 + + y11..y0 = absolute y value (vertical) + +6.2.2 Two finger touch + ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The packet format is exactly the same for two finger touch, except the hardware +sends two 6 byte packets. The first packet contains data for the first finger, +the second packet has data for the second finger. So for two finger touch a +total of 12 bytes are sent. + +///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// + +7. Hardware version 4 + ================== + +7.1 Registers + ~~~~~~~~~ +* reg_07 + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A + + A: 1 = enable absolute tracking + +7.2 Native absolute mode 6 byte packet format + ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +v4 hardware is a true multitouch touchpad, capable of tracking up to 5 fingers. +Unfortunately, due to PS/2's limited bandwidth, its packet format is rather +complex. + +Whenever the numbers or identities of the fingers changes, the hardware sends a +status packet to indicate how many and which fingers is on touchpad, followed by +head packets or motion packets. A head packet contains data of finger id, finger +position (absolute x, y values), width, and pressure. A motion packet contains +two fingers' position delta. + +For example, when status packet tells there are 2 fingers on touchpad, then we +can expect two following head packets. If the finger status doesn't change, +the following packets would be motion packets, only sending delta of finger +position, until we receive a status packet. + +One exception is one finger touch. when a status packet tells us there is only +one finger, the hardware would just send head packets afterwards. + +7.2.1 Status packet + ~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +byte 0: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + . . . . 0 1 R L + + L, R = 1 when Left, Right mouse button pressed + +byte 1: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + . . . ft4 ft3 ft2 ft1 ft0 + + ft4 ft3 ft2 ft1 ft0 ftn = 1 when finger n is on touchpad + +byte 2: not used + +byte 3: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + . . . 1 0 0 0 0 + + constant bits + +byte 4: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + p . . . . . . . + + p = 1 for palm + +byte 5: not used + +7.2.2 Head packet + ~~~~~~~~~~~ + +byte 0: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + w3 w2 w1 w0 0 1 R L + + L, R = 1 when Left, Right mouse button pressed + w3..w0 = finger width (spans how many trace lines) + +byte 1: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + p7 p6 p5 p4 x11 x10 x9 x8 + +byte 2: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + x7 x6 x5 x4 x3 x2 x1 x0 + + x11..x0 = absolute x value (horizontal) + +byte 3: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + id2 id1 id0 1 0 0 0 1 + + id2..id0 = finger id + +byte 4: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + p3 p1 p2 p0 y11 y10 y9 y8 + + p7..p0 = pressure + +byte 5: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + y7 y6 y5 y4 y3 y2 y1 y0 + + y11..y0 = absolute y value (vertical) + +7.2.3 Motion packet + ~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +byte 0: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + id2 id1 id0 w 0 1 R L + + L, R = 1 when Left, Right mouse button pressed + id2..id0 = finger id + w = 1 when delta overflows (> 127 or < -128), in this case + firmware sends us (delta x / 5) and (delta y / 5) + +byte 1: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + x7 x6 x5 x4 x3 x2 x1 x0 + + x7..x0 = delta x (two's complement) + +byte 2: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + y7 y6 y5 y4 y3 y2 y1 y0 + + y7..y0 = delta y (two's complement) + +byte 3: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + id2 id1 id0 1 0 0 1 0 + + id2..id0 = finger id + +byte 4: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + x7 x6 x5 x4 x3 x2 x1 x0 + + x7..x0 = delta x (two's complement) + +byte 5: + + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + y7 y6 y5 y4 y3 y2 y1 y0 + + y7..y0 = delta y (two's complement) + + byte 0 ~ 2 for one finger + byte 3 ~ 5 for another diff --git a/Documentation/input/input.txt b/Documentation/input/input.txt index b93c08442e3c..b3d6787b4fb1 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/input.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/input.txt @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ LCDs and many other purposes. The monitor and speaker controls should be easy to add to the hid/input interface, but for the UPSs and LCDs it doesn't make much sense. For this, -the hiddev interface was designed. See Documentation/usb/hiddev.txt +the hiddev interface was designed. See Documentation/hid/hiddev.txt for more information about it. The usage of the usbhid module is very simple, it takes no parameters, diff --git a/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt b/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt index 71536e78406f..543101c5bf26 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt @@ -65,6 +65,20 @@ the full state of each initiated contact has to reside in the receiving end. Upon receiving an MT event, one simply updates the appropriate attribute of the current slot. +Some devices identify and/or track more contacts than they can report to the +driver. A driver for such a device should associate one type B slot with each +contact that is reported by the hardware. Whenever the identity of the +contact associated with a slot changes, the driver should invalidate that +slot by changing its ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID. If the hardware signals that it is +tracking more contacts than it is currently reporting, the driver should use +a BTN_TOOL_*TAP event to inform userspace of the total number of contacts +being tracked by the hardware at that moment. The driver should do this by +explicitly sending the corresponding BTN_TOOL_*TAP event and setting +use_count to false when calling input_mt_report_pointer_emulation(). +The driver should only advertise as many slots as the hardware can report. +Userspace can detect that a driver can report more total contacts than slots +by noting that the largest supported BTN_TOOL_*TAP event is larger than the +total number of type B slots reported in the absinfo for the ABS_MT_SLOT axis. Protocol Example A ------------------ diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt b/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt index 0e0734b509d8..eda1eb1451a0 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ * Title: "The Kernel Hacking HOWTO" Author: Various Talented People, and Rusty. - Location: in kernel tree, Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking/ + Location: in kernel tree, Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl (must be built as "make {htmldocs | psdocs | pdfdocs}) Keywords: HOWTO, kernel contexts, deadlock, locking, modules, symbols, return conventions. @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ * Title: "Linux Kernel Locking HOWTO" Author: Various Talented People, and Rusty. - Location: in kernel tree, Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking/ + Location: in kernel tree, Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl (must be built as "make {htmldocs | psdocs | pdfdocs}) Keywords: locks, locking, spinlock, semaphore, atomic, race condition, bottom halves, tasklets, softirqs. diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index d6e6724446c8..a0c5c5f4fce6 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -49,6 +49,7 @@ parameter is applicable: EDD BIOS Enhanced Disk Drive Services (EDD) is enabled EFI EFI Partitioning (GPT) is enabled EIDE EIDE/ATAPI support is enabled. + EVM Extended Verification Module FB The frame buffer device is enabled. FTRACE Function tracing enabled. GCOV GCOV profiling is enabled. @@ -163,7 +164,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. rsdt -- prefer RSDT over (default) XSDT copy_dsdt -- copy DSDT to memory - See also Documentation/power/pm.txt, pci=noacpi + See also Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt, pci=noacpi acpi_rsdp= [ACPI,EFI,KEXEC] Pass the RSDP address to the kernel, mostly used @@ -306,6 +307,19 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. behaviour to be specified. Bit 0 enables warnings, bit 1 enables fixups, and bit 2 sends a segfault. + align_va_addr= [X86-64] + Align virtual addresses by clearing slice [14:12] when + allocating a VMA at process creation time. This option + gives you up to 3% performance improvement on AMD F15h + machines (where it is enabled by default) for a + CPU-intensive style benchmark, and it can vary highly in + a microbenchmark depending on workload and compiler. + + 1: only for 32-bit processes + 2: only for 64-bit processes + on: enable for both 32- and 64-bit processes + off: disable for both 32- and 64-bit processes + amd_iommu= [HW,X86-84] Pass parameters to the AMD IOMMU driver in the system. Possible values are: @@ -319,7 +333,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. amijoy.map= [HW,JOY] Amiga joystick support Map of devices attached to JOY0DAT and JOY1DAT Format: <a>,<b> - See also Documentation/kernel/input/joystick.txt + See also Documentation/input/joystick.txt analog.map= [HW,JOY] Analog joystick and gamepad support Specifies type or capabilities of an analog joystick @@ -408,7 +422,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. bttv.radio= Most important insmod options are available as kernel args too. bttv.pll= See Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Insmod-options - bttv.tuner= and Documentation/video4linux/bttv/CARDLIST + bttv.tuner= bulk_remove=off [PPC] This parameter disables the use of the pSeries firmware feature for flushing multiple hpte entries @@ -724,13 +738,13 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. elevator= [IOSCHED] Format: {"cfq" | "deadline" | "noop"} - See Documentation/block/as-iosched.txt and + See Documentation/block/cfq-iosched.txt and Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt for details. - elfcorehdr= [IA-64,PPC,SH,X86] + elfcorehdr=[size[KMG]@]offset[KMG] [IA64,PPC,SH,X86,S390] Specifies physical address of start of kernel core - image elf header. Generally kexec loader will - pass this option to capture kernel. + image elf header and optionally the size. Generally + kexec loader will pass this option to capture kernel. See Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt for details. enable_mtrr_cleanup [X86] @@ -760,12 +774,17 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. This option is obsoleted by the "netdev=" option, which has equivalent usage. See its documentation for details. + evm= [EVM] + Format: { "fix" } + Permit 'security.evm' to be updated regardless of + current integrity status. + failslab= fail_page_alloc= fail_make_request=[KNL] General fault injection mechanism. Format: <interval>,<probability>,<space>,<times> - See also /Documentation/fault-injection/. + See also Documentation/fault-injection/. floppy= [HW] See Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt. @@ -954,6 +973,9 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. ignore_loglevel [KNL] Ignore loglevel setting - this will print /all/ kernel messages to the console. Useful for debugging. + We also add it as printk module parameter, so users + could change it dynamically, usually by + /sys/module/printk/parameters/ignore_loglevel. ihash_entries= [KNL] Set number of hash buckets for inode cache. @@ -1014,10 +1036,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. has the capability. With this option, super page will not be supported. intremap= [X86-64, Intel-IOMMU] - Format: { on (default) | off | nosid } on enable Interrupt Remapping (default) off disable Interrupt Remapping nosid disable Source ID checking + no_x2apic_optout + BIOS x2APIC opt-out request will be ignored inttest= [IA-64] @@ -1181,6 +1204,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. [KVM,Intel] Disable FlexPriority feature (TPR shadow). Default is 1 (enabled) + kvm-intel.nested= + [KVM,Intel] Enable VMX nesting (nVMX). + Default is 0 (disabled) + kvm-intel.unrestricted_guest= [KVM,Intel] Disable unrestricted guest feature (virtualized real and unpaged mode) on capable @@ -1642,6 +1669,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. debugging driver suspend/resume hooks). This may not work reliably with all consoles, but is known to work with serial and VGA consoles. + To facilitate more flexible debugging, we also add + console_suspend, a printk module parameter to control + it. Users could use console_suspend (usually + /sys/module/printk/parameters/console_suspend) to + turn on/off it dynamically. noaliencache [MM, NUMA, SLAB] Disables the allocation of alien caches in the slab allocator. Saves per-node memory, @@ -1777,6 +1809,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. noresidual [PPC] Don't use residual data on PReP machines. + nordrand [X86] Disable the direct use of the RDRAND + instruction even if it is supported by the + processor. RDRAND is still available to user + space applications. + noresume [SWSUSP] Disables resume and restores original swap space. @@ -2240,6 +2277,13 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. in <PAGE_SIZE> units (needed only for swap files). See Documentation/power/swsusp-and-swap-files.txt + resumedelay= [HIBERNATION] Delay (in seconds) to pause before attempting to + read the resume files + + resumewait [HIBERNATION] Wait (indefinitely) for resume device to show up. + Useful for devices that are detected asynchronously + (e.g. USB and MMC devices). + hibernate= [HIBERNATION] noresume Don't check if there's a hibernation image present during boot. @@ -2375,7 +2419,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. Format: <integer> sonypi.*= [HW] Sony Programmable I/O Control Device driver - See Documentation/sonypi.txt + See Documentation/laptops/sonypi.txt specialix= [HW,SERIAL] Specialix multi-serial port adapter See Documentation/serial/specialix.txt. diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt index 61815483efa3..3ff0dad62d36 100644 --- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt +++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt @@ -736,7 +736,7 @@ status as "unknown". The available commands are: sysfs notes: The ThinkLight sysfs interface is documented by the LED class -documentation, in Documentation/leds-class.txt. The ThinkLight LED name +documentation, in Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt. The ThinkLight LED name is "tpacpi::thinklight". Due to limitations in the sysfs LED class, if the status of the ThinkLight @@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ All of the above can be turned on and off and can be made to blink. sysfs notes: The ThinkPad LED sysfs interface is described in detail by the LED class -documentation, in Documentation/leds-class.txt. +documentation, in Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt. The LEDs are named (in LED ID order, from 0 to 12): "tpacpi::power", "tpacpi:orange:batt", "tpacpi:green:batt", diff --git a/Documentation/media-framework.txt b/Documentation/media-framework.txt index 669b5fb03a86..3a0f879533ce 100644 --- a/Documentation/media-framework.txt +++ b/Documentation/media-framework.txt @@ -9,8 +9,8 @@ Introduction ------------ The media controller API is documented in DocBook format in -Documentation/DocBook/v4l/media-controller.xml. This document will focus on -the kernel-side implementation of the media framework. +Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/media-controller.xml. This document will focus +on the kernel-side implementation of the media framework. Abstract media device model diff --git a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt index f0d3a8026a56..2759f7c188f0 100644 --- a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt +++ b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ There are certain things that the Linux kernel memory barriers do not guarantee: [*] For information on bus mastering DMA and coherency please read: Documentation/PCI/pci.txt - Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt + Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt Documentation/DMA-API.txt diff --git a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic index 29ad4b106420..e7fb2c6023bc 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic +++ b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic @@ -1,61 +1,22 @@ -Copyright (c) 2009-2010 QLogic Corporation +Copyright (c) 2009-2011 QLogic Corporation QLogic Linux qlcnic NIC Driver -This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be -distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file. You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2). -You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file -under the following terms: - - 1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable), - must retain the above copyright notice, this list of - conditions and the following disclaimer. - - 2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above - copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other - materials provided with the distribution. - - 3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to - endorse or promote products derived from this software - without specific prior written permission - -REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE, -THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY -EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE -IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A -PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR -BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, -EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED -TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, -DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON -ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, -OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY -OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE -POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. - -USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT -CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR -OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT, -TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN -ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN -COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM. - EXHIBIT A - GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE - Version 2, June 1991 + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. - Preamble + Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public @@ -105,7 +66,7 @@ patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. - GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains @@ -304,7 +265,7 @@ make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. - NO WARRANTY + NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN diff --git a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt index 88d4afbdef98..c86d03f18a5b 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -[state: 17-04-2011] +[state: 21-08-2011] BATMAN-ADV ---------- @@ -68,9 +68,9 @@ All mesh wide settings can be found in batman's own interface folder: # ls /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/ -# aggregated_ogms gw_bandwidth hop_penalty -# bonding gw_mode orig_interval -# fragmentation gw_sel_class vis_mode +# aggregated_ogms fragmentation gw_sel_class vis_mode +# ap_isolation gw_bandwidth hop_penalty +# bonding gw_mode orig_interval There is a special folder for debugging information: diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index ca5cdcd0f0e3..cb7f3148035d 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -1045,6 +1045,11 @@ conf/interface/*: accept_ra - INTEGER Accept Router Advertisements; autoconfigure using them. + It also determines whether or not to transmit Router + Solicitations. If and only if the functional setting is to + accept Router Advertisements, Router Solicitations will be + transmitted. + Possible values are: 0 Do not accept Router Advertisements. 1 Accept Router Advertisements if forwarding is disabled. @@ -1115,14 +1120,14 @@ forwarding - INTEGER Possible values are: 0 Forwarding disabled 1 Forwarding enabled - 2 Forwarding enabled (Hybrid Mode) FALSE (0): By default, Host behaviour is assumed. This means: 1. IsRouter flag is not set in Neighbour Advertisements. - 2. Router Solicitations are being sent when necessary. + 2. If accept_ra is TRUE (default), transmit Router + Solicitations. 3. If accept_ra is TRUE (default), accept Router Advertisements (and do autoconfiguration). 4. If accept_redirects is TRUE (default), accept Redirects. @@ -1133,16 +1138,10 @@ forwarding - INTEGER This means exactly the reverse from the above: 1. IsRouter flag is set in Neighbour Advertisements. - 2. Router Solicitations are not sent. + 2. Router Solicitations are not sent unless accept_ra is 2. 3. Router Advertisements are ignored unless accept_ra is 2. 4. Redirects are ignored. - TRUE (2): - - Hybrid mode. Same behaviour as TRUE, except for: - - 2. Router Solicitations are being sent when necessary. - Default: 0 (disabled) if global forwarding is disabled (default), otherwise 1 (enabled). diff --git a/Documentation/networking/mac80211-injection.txt b/Documentation/networking/mac80211-injection.txt index b30e81ad5307..3a930072b161 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/mac80211-injection.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/mac80211-injection.txt @@ -23,6 +23,10 @@ radiotap headers and used to control injection: IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_F_FRAG: frame will be fragmented if longer than the current fragmentation threshold. + * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TX_FLAGS + + IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_F_TX_NOACK: frame should be sent without waiting for + an ACK even if it is a unicast frame The injection code can also skip all other currently defined radiotap fields facilitating replay of captured radiotap headers directly. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt b/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt index 87b3d15f523a..89358341682a 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ dev->hard_start_xmit: has to lock by itself when needed. It is recommended to use a try lock for this and return NETDEV_TX_LOCKED when the spin lock fails. The locking there should also properly protect against - set_multicast_list. Note that the use of NETIF_F_LLTX is deprecated. + set_rx_mode. Note that the use of NETIF_F_LLTX is deprecated. Don't use it for new drivers. Context: Process with BHs disabled or BH (timer), @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ dev->tx_timeout: Context: BHs disabled Notes: netif_queue_stopped() is guaranteed true -dev->set_multicast_list: +dev->set_rx_mode: Synchronization: netif_tx_lock spinlock. Context: BHs disabled diff --git a/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt b/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt index fe67b5c79f0f..a177de21d28e 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ of queues to IRQs can be determined from /proc/interrupts. By default, an IRQ may be handled on any CPU. Because a non-negligible part of packet processing takes place in receive interrupt handling, it is advantageous to spread receive interrupts between CPUs. To manually adjust the IRQ -affinity of each interrupt see Documentation/IRQ-affinity. Some systems +affinity of each interrupt see Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt. Some systems will be running irqbalance, a daemon that dynamically optimizes IRQ assignments and as a result may override any manual settings. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt index 57a24108b845..8d67980fabe8 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt @@ -76,7 +76,16 @@ core. 4.5) DMA descriptors Driver handles both normal and enhanced descriptors. The latter has been only -tested on DWC Ether MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.41a. +tested on DWC Ether MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.41a and later. + +STMMAC supports DMA descriptor to operate both in dual buffer (RING) +and linked-list(CHAINED) mode. In RING each descriptor points to two +data buffer pointers whereas in CHAINED mode they point to only one data +buffer pointer. RING mode is the default. + +In CHAINED mode each descriptor will have pointer to next descriptor in +the list, hence creating the explicit chaining in the descriptor itself, +whereas such explicit chaining is not possible in RING mode. 4.6) Ethtool support Ethtool is supported. Driver statistics and internal errors can be taken using: @@ -235,7 +244,38 @@ reset procedure etc). o enh_desc.c: functions for handling enhanced descriptors o norm_desc.c: functions for handling normal descriptors -5) TODO: +5) Debug Information + +The driver exports many information i.e. internal statistics, +debug information, MAC and DMA registers etc. + +These can be read in several ways depending on the +type of the information actually needed. + +For example a user can be use the ethtool support +to get statistics: e.g. using: ethtool -S ethX +(that shows the Management counters (MMC) if supported) +or sees the MAC/DMA registers: e.g. using: ethtool -d ethX + +Compiling the Kernel with CONFIG_DEBUG_FS and enabling the +STMMAC_DEBUG_FS option the driver will export the following +debugfs entries: + +/sys/kernel/debug/stmmaceth/descriptors_status + To show the DMA TX/RX descriptor rings + +Developer can also use the "debug" module parameter to get +further debug information. + +In the end, there are other macros (that cannot be enabled +via menuconfig) to turn-on the RX/TX DMA debugging, +specific MAC core debug printk etc. Others to enable the +debug in the TX and RX processes. +All these are only useful during the developing stage +and should never enabled inside the code for general usage. +In fact, these can generate an huge amount of debug messages. + +6) TODO: o XGMAC is not supported. o Review the timer optimisation code to use an embedded device that will be available in new chip generations. diff --git a/Documentation/pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b04cb7d45a16 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,950 @@ +PINCTRL (PIN CONTROL) subsystem +This document outlines the pin control subsystem in Linux + +This subsystem deals with: + +- Enumerating and naming controllable pins + +- Multiplexing of pins, pads, fingers (etc) see below for details + +The intention is to also deal with: + +- Software-controlled biasing and driving mode specific pins, such as + pull-up/down, open drain etc, load capacitance configuration when controlled + by software, etc. + + +Top-level interface +=================== + +Definition of PIN CONTROLLER: + +- A pin controller is a piece of hardware, usually a set of registers, that + can control PINs. It may be able to multiplex, bias, set load capacitance, + set drive strength etc for individual pins or groups of pins. + +Definition of PIN: + +- PINS are equal to pads, fingers, balls or whatever packaging input or + output line you want to control and these are denoted by unsigned integers + in the range 0..maxpin. This numberspace is local to each PIN CONTROLLER, so + there may be several such number spaces in a system. This pin space may + be sparse - i.e. there may be gaps in the space with numbers where no + pin exists. + +When a PIN CONTROLLER is instatiated, it will register a descriptor to the +pin control framework, and this descriptor contains an array of pin descriptors +describing the pins handled by this specific pin controller. + +Here is an example of a PGA (Pin Grid Array) chip seen from underneath: + + A B C D E F G H + + 8 o o o o o o o o + + 7 o o o o o o o o + + 6 o o o o o o o o + + 5 o o o o o o o o + + 4 o o o o o o o o + + 3 o o o o o o o o + + 2 o o o o o o o o + + 1 o o o o o o o o + +To register a pin controller and name all the pins on this package we can do +this in our driver: + +#include <linux/pinctrl/pinctrl.h> + +const struct pinctrl_pin_desc __refdata foo_pins[] = { + PINCTRL_PIN(0, "A1"), + PINCTRL_PIN(1, "A2"), + PINCTRL_PIN(2, "A3"), + ... + PINCTRL_PIN(61, "H6"), + PINCTRL_PIN(62, "H7"), + PINCTRL_PIN(63, "H8"), +}; + +static struct pinctrl_desc foo_desc = { + .name = "foo", + .pins = foo_pins, + .npins = ARRAY_SIZE(foo_pins), + .maxpin = 63, + .owner = THIS_MODULE, +}; + +int __init foo_probe(void) +{ + struct pinctrl_dev *pctl; + + pctl = pinctrl_register(&foo_desc, <PARENT>, NULL); + if (IS_ERR(pctl)) + pr_err("could not register foo pin driver\n"); +} + +Pins usually have fancier names than this. You can find these in the dataheet +for your chip. Notice that the core pinctrl.h file provides a fancy macro +called PINCTRL_PIN() to create the struct entries. As you can see I enumerated +the pins from 0 in the upper left corner to 63 in the lower right corner, +this enumeration was arbitrarily chosen, in practice you need to think +through your numbering system so that it matches the layout of registers +and such things in your driver, or the code may become complicated. You must +also consider matching of offsets to the GPIO ranges that may be handled by +the pin controller. + +For a padring with 467 pads, as opposed to actual pins, I used an enumeration +like this, walking around the edge of the chip, which seems to be industry +standard too (all these pads had names, too): + + + 0 ..... 104 + 466 105 + . . + . . + 358 224 + 357 .... 225 + + +Pin groups +========== + +Many controllers need to deal with groups of pins, so the pin controller +subsystem has a mechanism for enumerating groups of pins and retrieving the +actual enumerated pins that are part of a certain group. + +For example, say that we have a group of pins dealing with an SPI interface +on { 0, 8, 16, 24 }, and a group of pins dealing with an I2C interface on pins +on { 24, 25 }. + +These two groups are presented to the pin control subsystem by implementing +some generic pinctrl_ops like this: + +#include <linux/pinctrl/pinctrl.h> + +struct foo_group { + const char *name; + const unsigned int *pins; + const unsigned num_pins; +}; + +static unsigned int spi0_pins[] = { 0, 8, 16, 24 }; +static unsigned int i2c0_pins[] = { 24, 25 }; + +static const struct foo_group foo_groups[] = { + { + .name = "spi0_grp", + .pins = spi0_pins, + .num_pins = ARRAY_SIZE(spi0_pins), + }, + { + .name = "i2c0_grp", + .pins = i2c0_pins, + .num_pins = ARRAY_SIZE(i2c0_pins), + }, +}; + + +static int foo_list_groups(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector) +{ + if (selector >= ARRAY_SIZE(foo_groups)) + return -EINVAL; + return 0; +} + +static const char *foo_get_group_name(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, + unsigned selector) +{ + return foo_groups[selector].name; +} + +static int foo_get_group_pins(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector, + unsigned ** const pins, + unsigned * const num_pins) +{ + *pins = (unsigned *) foo_groups[selector].pins; + *num_pins = foo_groups[selector].num_pins; + return 0; +} + +static struct pinctrl_ops foo_pctrl_ops = { + .list_groups = foo_list_groups, + .get_group_name = foo_get_group_name, + .get_group_pins = foo_get_group_pins, +}; + + +static struct pinctrl_desc foo_desc = { + ... + .pctlops = &foo_pctrl_ops, +}; + +The pin control subsystem will call the .list_groups() function repeatedly +beginning on 0 until it returns non-zero to determine legal selectors, then +it will call the other functions to retrieve the name and pins of the group. +Maintaining the data structure of the groups is up to the driver, this is +just a simple example - in practice you may need more entries in your group +structure, for example specific register ranges associated with each group +and so on. + + +Interaction with the GPIO subsystem +=================================== + +The GPIO drivers may want to perform operations of various types on the same +physical pins that are also registered as pin controller pins. + +Since the pin controller subsystem have its pinspace local to the pin +controller we need a mapping so that the pin control subsystem can figure out +which pin controller handles control of a certain GPIO pin. Since a single +pin controller may be muxing several GPIO ranges (typically SoCs that have +one set of pins but internally several GPIO silicon blocks, each modeled as +a struct gpio_chip) any number of GPIO ranges can be added to a pin controller +instance like this: + +struct gpio_chip chip_a; +struct gpio_chip chip_b; + +static struct pinctrl_gpio_range gpio_range_a = { + .name = "chip a", + .id = 0, + .base = 32, + .npins = 16, + .gc = &chip_a; +}; + +static struct pinctrl_gpio_range gpio_range_a = { + .name = "chip b", + .id = 0, + .base = 48, + .npins = 8, + .gc = &chip_b; +}; + + +{ + struct pinctrl_dev *pctl; + ... + pinctrl_add_gpio_range(pctl, &gpio_range_a); + pinctrl_add_gpio_range(pctl, &gpio_range_b); +} + +So this complex system has one pin controller handling two different +GPIO chips. Chip a has 16 pins and chip b has 8 pins. They are mapped in +the global GPIO pin space at: + +chip a: [32 .. 47] +chip b: [48 .. 55] + +When GPIO-specific functions in the pin control subsystem are called, these +ranges will be used to look up the apropriate pin controller by inspecting +and matching the pin to the pin ranges across all controllers. When a +pin controller handling the matching range is found, GPIO-specific functions +will be called on that specific pin controller. + +For all functionalities dealing with pin biasing, pin muxing etc, the pin +controller subsystem will subtract the range's .base offset from the passed +in gpio pin number, and pass that on to the pin control driver, so the driver +will get an offset into its handled number range. Further it is also passed +the range ID value, so that the pin controller knows which range it should +deal with. + +For example: if a user issues pinctrl_gpio_set_foo(50), the pin control +subsystem will find that the second range on this pin controller matches, +subtract the base 48 and call the +pinctrl_driver_gpio_set_foo(pinctrl, range, 2) where the latter function has +this signature: + +int pinctrl_driver_gpio_set_foo(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, + struct pinctrl_gpio_range *rangeid, + unsigned offset); + +Now the driver knows that we want to do some GPIO-specific operation on the +second GPIO range handled by "chip b", at offset 2 in that specific range. + +(If the GPIO subsystem is ever refactored to use a local per-GPIO controller +pin space, this mapping will need to be augmented accordingly.) + + +PINMUX interfaces +================= + +These calls use the pinmux_* naming prefix. No other calls should use that +prefix. + + +What is pinmuxing? +================== + +PINMUX, also known as padmux, ballmux, alternate functions or mission modes +is a way for chip vendors producing some kind of electrical packages to use +a certain physical pin (ball, pad, finger, etc) for multiple mutually exclusive +functions, depending on the application. By "application" in this context +we usually mean a way of soldering or wiring the package into an electronic +system, even though the framework makes it possible to also change the function +at runtime. + +Here is an example of a PGA (Pin Grid Array) chip seen from underneath: + + A B C D E F G H + +---+ + 8 | o | o o o o o o o + | | + 7 | o | o o o o o o o + | | + 6 | o | o o o o o o o + +---+---+ + 5 | o | o | o o o o o o + +---+---+ +---+ + 4 o o o o o o | o | o + | | + 3 o o o o o o | o | o + | | + 2 o o o o o o | o | o + +-------+-------+-------+---+---+ + 1 | o o | o o | o o | o | o | + +-------+-------+-------+---+---+ + +This is not tetris. The game to think of is chess. Not all PGA/BGA packages +are chessboard-like, big ones have "holes" in some arrangement according to +different design patterns, but we're using this as a simple example. Of the +pins you see some will be taken by things like a few VCC and GND to feed power +to the chip, and quite a few will be taken by large ports like an external +memory interface. The remaining pins will often be subject to pin multiplexing. + +The example 8x8 PGA package above will have pin numbers 0 thru 63 assigned to +its physical pins. It will name the pins { A1, A2, A3 ... H6, H7, H8 } using +pinctrl_register_pins() and a suitable data set as shown earlier. + +In this 8x8 BGA package the pins { A8, A7, A6, A5 } can be used as an SPI port +(these are four pins: CLK, RXD, TXD, FRM). In that case, pin B5 can be used as +some general-purpose GPIO pin. However, in another setting, pins { A5, B5 } can +be used as an I2C port (these are just two pins: SCL, SDA). Needless to say, +we cannot use the SPI port and I2C port at the same time. However in the inside +of the package the silicon performing the SPI logic can alternatively be routed +out on pins { G4, G3, G2, G1 }. + +On the botton row at { A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1 } we have something +special - it's an external MMC bus that can be 2, 4 or 8 bits wide, and it will +consume 2, 4 or 8 pins respectively, so either { A1, B1 } are taken or +{ A1, B1, C1, D1 } or all of them. If we use all 8 bits, we cannot use the SPI +port on pins { G4, G3, G2, G1 } of course. + +This way the silicon blocks present inside the chip can be multiplexed "muxed" +out on different pin ranges. Often contemporary SoC (systems on chip) will +contain several I2C, SPI, SDIO/MMC, etc silicon blocks that can be routed to +different pins by pinmux settings. + +Since general-purpose I/O pins (GPIO) are typically always in shortage, it is +common to be able to use almost any pin as a GPIO pin if it is not currently +in use by some other I/O port. + + +Pinmux conventions +================== + +The purpose of the pinmux functionality in the pin controller subsystem is to +abstract and provide pinmux settings to the devices you choose to instantiate +in your machine configuration. It is inspired by the clk, GPIO and regulator +subsystems, so devices will request their mux setting, but it's also possible +to request a single pin for e.g. GPIO. + +Definitions: + +- FUNCTIONS can be switched in and out by a driver residing with the pin + control subsystem in the drivers/pinctrl/* directory of the kernel. The + pin control driver knows the possible functions. In the example above you can + identify three pinmux functions, one for spi, one for i2c and one for mmc. + +- FUNCTIONS are assumed to be enumerable from zero in a one-dimensional array. + In this case the array could be something like: { spi0, i2c0, mmc0 } + for the three available functions. + +- FUNCTIONS have PIN GROUPS as defined on the generic level - so a certain + function is *always* associated with a certain set of pin groups, could + be just a single one, but could also be many. In the example above the + function i2c is associated with the pins { A5, B5 }, enumerated as + { 24, 25 } in the controller pin space. + + The Function spi is associated with pin groups { A8, A7, A6, A5 } + and { G4, G3, G2, G1 }, which are enumerated as { 0, 8, 16, 24 } and + { 38, 46, 54, 62 } respectively. + + Group names must be unique per pin controller, no two groups on the same + controller may have the same name. + +- The combination of a FUNCTION and a PIN GROUP determine a certain function + for a certain set of pins. The knowledge of the functions and pin groups + and their machine-specific particulars are kept inside the pinmux driver, + from the outside only the enumerators are known, and the driver core can: + + - Request the name of a function with a certain selector (>= 0) + - A list of groups associated with a certain function + - Request that a certain group in that list to be activated for a certain + function + + As already described above, pin groups are in turn self-descriptive, so + the core will retrieve the actual pin range in a certain group from the + driver. + +- FUNCTIONS and GROUPS on a certain PIN CONTROLLER are MAPPED to a certain + device by the board file, device tree or similar machine setup configuration + mechanism, similar to how regulators are connected to devices, usually by + name. Defining a pin controller, function and group thus uniquely identify + the set of pins to be used by a certain device. (If only one possible group + of pins is available for the function, no group name need to be supplied - + the core will simply select the first and only group available.) + + In the example case we can define that this particular machine shall + use device spi0 with pinmux function fspi0 group gspi0 and i2c0 on function + fi2c0 group gi2c0, on the primary pin controller, we get mappings + like these: + + { + {"map-spi0", spi0, pinctrl0, fspi0, gspi0}, + {"map-i2c0", i2c0, pinctrl0, fi2c0, gi2c0} + } + + Every map must be assigned a symbolic name, pin controller and function. + The group is not compulsory - if it is omitted the first group presented by + the driver as applicable for the function will be selected, which is + useful for simple cases. + + The device name is present in map entries tied to specific devices. Maps + without device names are referred to as SYSTEM pinmuxes, such as can be taken + by the machine implementation on boot and not tied to any specific device. + + It is possible to map several groups to the same combination of device, + pin controller and function. This is for cases where a certain function on + a certain pin controller may use different sets of pins in different + configurations. + +- PINS for a certain FUNCTION using a certain PIN GROUP on a certain + PIN CONTROLLER are provided on a first-come first-serve basis, so if some + other device mux setting or GPIO pin request has already taken your physical + pin, you will be denied the use of it. To get (activate) a new setting, the + old one has to be put (deactivated) first. + +Sometimes the documentation and hardware registers will be oriented around +pads (or "fingers") rather than pins - these are the soldering surfaces on the +silicon inside the package, and may or may not match the actual number of +pins/balls underneath the capsule. Pick some enumeration that makes sense to +you. Define enumerators only for the pins you can control if that makes sense. + +Assumptions: + +We assume that the number possible function maps to pin groups is limited by +the hardware. I.e. we assume that there is no system where any function can be +mapped to any pin, like in a phone exchange. So the available pins groups for +a certain function will be limited to a few choices (say up to eight or so), +not hundreds or any amount of choices. This is the characteristic we have found +by inspecting available pinmux hardware, and a necessary assumption since we +expect pinmux drivers to present *all* possible function vs pin group mappings +to the subsystem. + + +Pinmux drivers +============== + +The pinmux core takes care of preventing conflicts on pins and calling +the pin controller driver to execute different settings. + +It is the responsibility of the pinmux driver to impose further restrictions +(say for example infer electronic limitations due to load etc) to determine +whether or not the requested function can actually be allowed, and in case it +is possible to perform the requested mux setting, poke the hardware so that +this happens. + +Pinmux drivers are required to supply a few callback functions, some are +optional. Usually the enable() and disable() functions are implemented, +writing values into some certain registers to activate a certain mux setting +for a certain pin. + +A simple driver for the above example will work by setting bits 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 +into some register named MUX to select a certain function with a certain +group of pins would work something like this: + +#include <linux/pinctrl/pinctrl.h> +#include <linux/pinctrl/pinmux.h> + +struct foo_group { + const char *name; + const unsigned int *pins; + const unsigned num_pins; +}; + +static const unsigned spi0_0_pins[] = { 0, 8, 16, 24 }; +static const unsigned spi0_1_pins[] = { 38, 46, 54, 62 }; +static const unsigned i2c0_pins[] = { 24, 25 }; +static const unsigned mmc0_1_pins[] = { 56, 57 }; +static const unsigned mmc0_2_pins[] = { 58, 59 }; +static const unsigned mmc0_3_pins[] = { 60, 61, 62, 63 }; + +static const struct foo_group foo_groups[] = { + { + .name = "spi0_0_grp", + .pins = spi0_0_pins, + .num_pins = ARRAY_SIZE(spi0_0_pins), + }, + { + .name = "spi0_1_grp", + .pins = spi0_1_pins, + .num_pins = ARRAY_SIZE(spi0_1_pins), + }, + { + .name = "i2c0_grp", + .pins = i2c0_pins, + .num_pins = ARRAY_SIZE(i2c0_pins), + }, + { + .name = "mmc0_1_grp", + .pins = mmc0_1_pins, + .num_pins = ARRAY_SIZE(mmc0_1_pins), + }, + { + .name = "mmc0_2_grp", + .pins = mmc0_2_pins, + .num_pins = ARRAY_SIZE(mmc0_2_pins), + }, + { + .name = "mmc0_3_grp", + .pins = mmc0_3_pins, + .num_pins = ARRAY_SIZE(mmc0_3_pins), + }, +}; + + +static int foo_list_groups(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector) +{ + if (selector >= ARRAY_SIZE(foo_groups)) + return -EINVAL; + return 0; +} + +static const char *foo_get_group_name(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, + unsigned selector) +{ + return foo_groups[selector].name; +} + +static int foo_get_group_pins(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector, + unsigned ** const pins, + unsigned * const num_pins) +{ + *pins = (unsigned *) foo_groups[selector].pins; + *num_pins = foo_groups[selector].num_pins; + return 0; +} + +static struct pinctrl_ops foo_pctrl_ops = { + .list_groups = foo_list_groups, + .get_group_name = foo_get_group_name, + .get_group_pins = foo_get_group_pins, +}; + +struct foo_pmx_func { + const char *name; + const char * const *groups; + const unsigned num_groups; +}; + +static const char * const spi0_groups[] = { "spi0_1_grp" }; +static const char * const i2c0_groups[] = { "i2c0_grp" }; +static const char * const mmc0_groups[] = { "mmc0_1_grp", "mmc0_2_grp", + "mmc0_3_grp" }; + +static const struct foo_pmx_func foo_functions[] = { + { + .name = "spi0", + .groups = spi0_groups, + .num_groups = ARRAY_SIZE(spi0_groups), + }, + { + .name = "i2c0", + .groups = i2c0_groups, + .num_groups = ARRAY_SIZE(i2c0_groups), + }, + { + .name = "mmc0", + .groups = mmc0_groups, + .num_groups = ARRAY_SIZE(mmc0_groups), + }, +}; + +int foo_list_funcs(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector) +{ + if (selector >= ARRAY_SIZE(foo_functions)) + return -EINVAL; + return 0; +} + +const char *foo_get_fname(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector) +{ + return myfuncs[selector].name; +} + +static int foo_get_groups(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector, + const char * const **groups, + unsigned * const num_groups) +{ + *groups = foo_functions[selector].groups; + *num_groups = foo_functions[selector].num_groups; + return 0; +} + +int foo_enable(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector, + unsigned group) +{ + u8 regbit = (1 << group); + + writeb((readb(MUX)|regbit), MUX) + return 0; +} + +int foo_disable(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector, + unsigned group) +{ + u8 regbit = (1 << group); + + writeb((readb(MUX) & ~(regbit)), MUX) + return 0; +} + +struct pinmux_ops foo_pmxops = { + .list_functions = foo_list_funcs, + .get_function_name = foo_get_fname, + .get_function_groups = foo_get_groups, + .enable = foo_enable, + .disable = foo_disable, +}; + +/* Pinmux operations are handled by some pin controller */ +static struct pinctrl_desc foo_desc = { + ... + .pctlops = &foo_pctrl_ops, + .pmxops = &foo_pmxops, +}; + +In the example activating muxing 0 and 1 at the same time setting bits +0 and 1, uses one pin in common so they would collide. + +The beauty of the pinmux subsystem is that since it keeps track of all +pins and who is using them, it will already have denied an impossible +request like that, so the driver does not need to worry about such +things - when it gets a selector passed in, the pinmux subsystem makes +sure no other device or GPIO assignment is already using the selected +pins. Thus bits 0 and 1 in the control register will never be set at the +same time. + +All the above functions are mandatory to implement for a pinmux driver. + + +Pinmux interaction with the GPIO subsystem +========================================== + +The function list could become long, especially if you can convert every +individual pin into a GPIO pin independent of any other pins, and then try +the approach to define every pin as a function. + +In this case, the function array would become 64 entries for each GPIO +setting and then the device functions. + +For this reason there is an additional function a pinmux driver can implement +to enable only GPIO on an individual pin: .gpio_request_enable(). The same +.free() function as for other functions is assumed to be usable also for +GPIO pins. + +This function will pass in the affected GPIO range identified by the pin +controller core, so you know which GPIO pins are being affected by the request +operation. + +Alternatively it is fully allowed to use named functions for each GPIO +pin, the pinmux_request_gpio() will attempt to obtain the function "gpioN" +where "N" is the global GPIO pin number if no special GPIO-handler is +registered. + + +Pinmux board/machine configuration +================================== + +Boards and machines define how a certain complete running system is put +together, including how GPIOs and devices are muxed, how regulators are +constrained and how the clock tree looks. Of course pinmux settings are also +part of this. + +A pinmux config for a machine looks pretty much like a simple regulator +configuration, so for the example array above we want to enable i2c and +spi on the second function mapping: + +#include <linux/pinctrl/machine.h> + +static struct pinmux_map pmx_mapping[] = { + { + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "spi0", + .dev_name = "foo-spi.0", + }, + { + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "i2c0", + .dev_name = "foo-i2c.0", + }, + { + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "mmc0", + .dev_name = "foo-mmc.0", + }, +}; + +The dev_name here matches to the unique device name that can be used to look +up the device struct (just like with clockdev or regulators). The function name +must match a function provided by the pinmux driver handling this pin range. + +As you can see we may have several pin controllers on the system and thus +we need to specify which one of them that contain the functions we wish +to map. The map can also use struct device * directly, so there is no +inherent need to use strings to specify .dev_name or .ctrl_dev_name, these +are for the situation where you do not have a handle to the struct device *, +for example if they are not yet instantiated or cumbersome to obtain. + +You register this pinmux mapping to the pinmux subsystem by simply: + + ret = pinmux_register_mappings(&pmx_mapping, ARRAY_SIZE(pmx_mapping)); + +Since the above construct is pretty common there is a helper macro to make +it even more compact which assumes you want to use pinctrl.0 and position +0 for mapping, for example: + +static struct pinmux_map pmx_mapping[] = { + PINMUX_MAP_PRIMARY("I2CMAP", "i2c0", "foo-i2c.0"), +}; + + +Complex mappings +================ + +As it is possible to map a function to different groups of pins an optional +.group can be specified like this: + +... +{ + .name = "spi0-pos-A", + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "spi0", + .group = "spi0_0_grp", + .dev_name = "foo-spi.0", +}, +{ + .name = "spi0-pos-B", + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "spi0", + .group = "spi0_1_grp", + .dev_name = "foo-spi.0", +}, +... + +This example mapping is used to switch between two positions for spi0 at +runtime, as described further below under the heading "Runtime pinmuxing". + +Further it is possible to match several groups of pins to the same function +for a single device, say for example in the mmc0 example above, where you can +additively expand the mmc0 bus from 2 to 4 to 8 pins. If we want to use all +three groups for a total of 2+2+4 = 8 pins (for an 8-bit MMC bus as is the +case), we define a mapping like this: + +... +{ + .name "2bit" + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "mmc0", + .group = "mmc0_0_grp", + .dev_name = "foo-mmc.0", +}, +{ + .name "4bit" + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "mmc0", + .group = "mmc0_0_grp", + .dev_name = "foo-mmc.0", +}, +{ + .name "4bit" + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "mmc0", + .group = "mmc0_1_grp", + .dev_name = "foo-mmc.0", +}, +{ + .name "8bit" + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "mmc0", + .group = "mmc0_0_grp", + .dev_name = "foo-mmc.0", +}, +{ + .name "8bit" + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "mmc0", + .group = "mmc0_1_grp", + .dev_name = "foo-mmc.0", +}, +{ + .name "8bit" + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "mmc0", + .group = "mmc0_2_grp", + .dev_name = "foo-mmc.0", +}, +... + +The result of grabbing this mapping from the device with something like +this (see next paragraph): + + pmx = pinmux_get(&device, "8bit"); + +Will be that you activate all the three bottom records in the mapping at +once. Since they share the same name, pin controller device, funcion and +device, and since we allow multiple groups to match to a single device, they +all get selected, and they all get enabled and disable simultaneously by the +pinmux core. + + +Pinmux requests from drivers +============================ + +Generally it is discouraged to let individual drivers get and enable pinmuxes. +So if possible, handle the pinmuxes in platform code or some other place where +you have access to all the affected struct device * pointers. In some cases +where a driver needs to switch between different mux mappings at runtime +this is not possible. + +A driver may request a certain mux to be activated, usually just the default +mux like this: + +#include <linux/pinctrl/pinmux.h> + +struct foo_state { + struct pinmux *pmx; + ... +}; + +foo_probe() +{ + /* Allocate a state holder named "state" etc */ + struct pinmux pmx; + + pmx = pinmux_get(&device, NULL); + if IS_ERR(pmx) + return PTR_ERR(pmx); + pinmux_enable(pmx); + + state->pmx = pmx; +} + +foo_remove() +{ + pinmux_disable(state->pmx); + pinmux_put(state->pmx); +} + +If you want to grab a specific mux mapping and not just the first one found for +this device you can specify a specific mapping name, for example in the above +example the second i2c0 setting: pinmux_get(&device, "spi0-pos-B"); + +This get/enable/disable/put sequence can just as well be handled by bus drivers +if you don't want each and every driver to handle it and you know the +arrangement on your bus. + +The semantics of the get/enable respective disable/put is as follows: + +- pinmux_get() is called in process context to reserve the pins affected with + a certain mapping and set up the pinmux core and the driver. It will allocate + a struct from the kernel memory to hold the pinmux state. + +- pinmux_enable()/pinmux_disable() is quick and can be called from fastpath + (irq context) when you quickly want to set up/tear down the hardware muxing + when running a device driver. Usually it will just poke some values into a + register. + +- pinmux_disable() is called in process context to tear down the pin requests + and release the state holder struct for the mux setting. + +Usually the pinmux core handled the get/put pair and call out to the device +drivers bookkeeping operations, like checking available functions and the +associated pins, whereas the enable/disable pass on to the pin controller +driver which takes care of activating and/or deactivating the mux setting by +quickly poking some registers. + +The pins are allocated for your device when you issue the pinmux_get() call, +after this you should be able to see this in the debugfs listing of all pins. + + +System pinmux hogging +===================== + +A system pinmux map entry, i.e. a pinmux setting that does not have a device +associated with it, can be hogged by the core when the pin controller is +registered. This means that the core will attempt to call pinmux_get() and +pinmux_enable() on it immediately after the pin control device has been +registered. + +This is enabled by simply setting the .hog_on_boot field in the map to true, +like this: + +{ + .name "POWERMAP" + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "power_func", + .hog_on_boot = true, +}, + +Since it may be common to request the core to hog a few always-applicable +mux settings on the primary pin controller, there is a convenience macro for +this: + +PINMUX_MAP_PRIMARY_SYS_HOG("POWERMAP", "power_func") + +This gives the exact same result as the above construction. + + +Runtime pinmuxing +================= + +It is possible to mux a certain function in and out at runtime, say to move +an SPI port from one set of pins to another set of pins. Say for example for +spi0 in the example above, we expose two different groups of pins for the same +function, but with different named in the mapping as described under +"Advanced mapping" above. So we have two mappings named "spi0-pos-A" and +"spi0-pos-B". + +This snippet first muxes the function in the pins defined by group A, enables +it, disables and releases it, and muxes it in on the pins defined by group B: + +foo_switch() +{ + struct pinmux pmx; + + /* Enable on position A */ + pmx = pinmux_get(&device, "spi0-pos-A"); + if IS_ERR(pmx) + return PTR_ERR(pmx); + pinmux_enable(pmx); + + /* This releases the pins again */ + pinmux_disable(pmx); + pinmux_put(pmx); + + /* Enable on position B */ + pmx = pinmux_get(&device, "spi0-pos-B"); + if IS_ERR(pmx) + return PTR_ERR(pmx); + pinmux_enable(pmx); + ... +} + +The above has to be done from process context. diff --git a/Documentation/power/00-INDEX b/Documentation/power/00-INDEX index 45e9d4a91284..a4d682f54231 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/power/00-INDEX @@ -26,6 +26,8 @@ s2ram.txt - How to get suspend to ram working (and debug it when it isn't) states.txt - System power management states +suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt + - Explains the interaction between Suspend-to-RAM (S3) and CPU hotplug swsusp-and-swap-files.txt - Using swap files with software suspend (to disk) swsusp-dmcrypt.txt diff --git a/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt b/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt index ddd78172ef73..40a4c65f380a 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ kernel messages using the serial console. This may provide you with some information about the reasons of the suspend (resume) failure. Alternatively, it may be possible to use a FireWire port for debugging with firescope (ftp://ftp.firstfloor.org/pub/ak/firescope/). On x86 it is also possible to -use the PM_TRACE mechanism documented in Documentation/s2ram.txt . +use the PM_TRACE mechanism documented in Documentation/power/s2ram.txt . 2. Testing suspend to RAM (STR) @@ -201,3 +201,27 @@ case, you may be able to search for failing drivers by following the procedure analogous to the one described in section 1. If you find some failing drivers, you will have to unload them every time before an STR transition (ie. before you run s2ram), and please report the problems with them. + +There is a debugfs entry which shows the suspend to RAM statistics. Here is an +example of its output. + # mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug + # cat /sys/kernel/debug/suspend_stats + success: 20 + fail: 5 + failed_freeze: 0 + failed_prepare: 0 + failed_suspend: 5 + failed_suspend_noirq: 0 + failed_resume: 0 + failed_resume_noirq: 0 + failures: + last_failed_dev: alarm + adc + last_failed_errno: -16 + -16 + last_failed_step: suspend + suspend +Field success means the success number of suspend to RAM, and field fail means +the failure number. Others are the failure number of different steps of suspend +to RAM. suspend_stats just lists the last 2 failed devices, error number and +failed step of suspend. diff --git a/Documentation/power/devices.txt b/Documentation/power/devices.txt index 3384d5996be2..646a89e0c07d 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/devices.txt @@ -152,7 +152,9 @@ try to use its wakeup mechanism. device_set_wakeup_enable() affects this flag; for the most part drivers should not change its value. The initial value of should_wakeup is supposed to be false for the majority of devices; the major exceptions are power buttons, keyboards, and Ethernet adapters whose WoL -(wake-on-LAN) feature has been set up with ethtool. +(wake-on-LAN) feature has been set up with ethtool. It should also default +to true for devices that don't generate wakeup requests on their own but merely +forward wakeup requests from one bus to another (like PCI bridges). Whether or not a device is capable of issuing wakeup events is a hardware matter, and the kernel is responsible for keeping track of it. By contrast, @@ -279,10 +281,6 @@ When the system goes into the standby or memory sleep state, the phases are: time.) Unlike the other suspend-related phases, during the prepare phase the device tree is traversed top-down. - In addition to that, if device drivers need to allocate additional - memory to be able to hadle device suspend correctly, that should be - done in the prepare phase. - After the prepare callback method returns, no new children may be registered below the device. The method may also prepare the device or driver in some way for the upcoming system power transition (for diff --git a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt index bfed898a03fc..17e130a80347 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt @@ -4,14 +4,19 @@ This interface provides a kernel and user mode interface for registering performance expectations by drivers, subsystems and user space applications on one of the parameters. -Currently we have {cpu_dma_latency, network_latency, network_throughput} as the -initial set of pm_qos parameters. +Two different PM QoS frameworks are available: +1. PM QoS classes for cpu_dma_latency, network_latency, network_throughput. +2. the per-device PM QoS framework provides the API to manage the per-device latency +constraints. Each parameters have defined units: * latency: usec * timeout: usec * throughput: kbs (kilo bit / sec) + +1. PM QoS framework + The infrastructure exposes multiple misc device nodes one per implemented parameter. The set of parameters implement is defined by pm_qos_power_init() and pm_qos_params.h. This is done because having the available parameters @@ -23,14 +28,18 @@ an aggregated target value. The aggregated target value is updated with changes to the request list or elements of the list. Typically the aggregated target value is simply the max or min of the request values held in the parameter list elements. +Note: the aggregated target value is implemented as an atomic variable so that +reading the aggregated value does not require any locking mechanism. + From kernel mode the use of this interface is simple: -handle = pm_qos_add_request(param_class, target_value): -Will insert an element into the list for that identified PM_QOS class with the +void pm_qos_add_request(handle, param_class, target_value): +Will insert an element into the list for that identified PM QoS class with the target value. Upon change to this list the new target is recomputed and any registered notifiers are called only if the target value is now different. -Clients of pm_qos need to save the returned handle. +Clients of pm_qos need to save the returned handle for future use in other +pm_qos API functions. void pm_qos_update_request(handle, new_target_value): Will update the list element pointed to by the handle with the new target value @@ -42,6 +51,20 @@ Will remove the element. After removal it will update the aggregate target and call the notification tree if the target was changed as a result of removing the request. +int pm_qos_request(param_class): +Returns the aggregated value for a given PM QoS class. + +int pm_qos_request_active(handle): +Returns if the request is still active, i.e. it has not been removed from a +PM QoS class constraints list. + +int pm_qos_add_notifier(param_class, notifier): +Adds a notification callback function to the PM QoS class. The callback is +called when the aggregated value for the PM QoS class is changed. + +int pm_qos_remove_notifier(int param_class, notifier): +Removes the notification callback function for the PM QoS class. + From user mode: Only processes can register a pm_qos request. To provide for automatic @@ -63,4 +86,63 @@ To remove the user mode request for a target value simply close the device node. +2. PM QoS per-device latency framework + +For each device a list of performance requests is maintained along with +an aggregated target value. The aggregated target value is updated with +changes to the request list or elements of the list. Typically the +aggregated target value is simply the max or min of the request values held +in the parameter list elements. +Note: the aggregated target value is implemented as an atomic variable so that +reading the aggregated value does not require any locking mechanism. + + +From kernel mode the use of this interface is the following: + +int dev_pm_qos_add_request(device, handle, value): +Will insert an element into the list for that identified device with the +target value. Upon change to this list the new target is recomputed and any +registered notifiers are called only if the target value is now different. +Clients of dev_pm_qos need to save the handle for future use in other +dev_pm_qos API functions. + +int dev_pm_qos_update_request(handle, new_value): +Will update the list element pointed to by the handle with the new target value +and recompute the new aggregated target, calling the notification trees if the +target is changed. + +int dev_pm_qos_remove_request(handle): +Will remove the element. After removal it will update the aggregate target and +call the notification trees if the target was changed as a result of removing +the request. + +s32 dev_pm_qos_read_value(device): +Returns the aggregated value for a given device's constraints list. + + +Notification mechanisms: +The per-device PM QoS framework has 2 different and distinct notification trees: +a per-device notification tree and a global notification tree. + +int dev_pm_qos_add_notifier(device, notifier): +Adds a notification callback function for the device. +The callback is called when the aggregated value of the device constraints list +is changed. + +int dev_pm_qos_remove_notifier(device, notifier): +Removes the notification callback function for the device. + +int dev_pm_qos_add_global_notifier(notifier): +Adds a notification callback function in the global notification tree of the +framework. +The callback is called when the aggregated value for any device is changed. + +int dev_pm_qos_remove_global_notifier(notifier): +Removes the notification callback function from the global notification tree +of the framework. + + +From user mode: +No API for user space access to the per-device latency constraints is provided +yet - still under discussion. diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt index b42419b52e44..ce63af0a8e35 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ initialisation code by creating a struct regulator_consumer_supply for each regulator. struct regulator_consumer_supply { - struct device *dev; /* consumer */ + const char *dev_name; /* consumer dev_name() */ const char *supply; /* consumer supply - e.g. "vcc" */ }; @@ -24,13 +24,13 @@ e.g. for the machine above static struct regulator_consumer_supply regulator1_consumers[] = { { - .dev = &platform_consumerB_device.dev, - .supply = "Vcc", + .dev_name = "dev_name(consumer B)", + .supply = "Vcc", },}; static struct regulator_consumer_supply regulator2_consumers[] = { { - .dev = &platform_consumerA_device.dev, + .dev = "dev_name(consumer A"), .supply = "Vcc", },}; @@ -43,6 +43,7 @@ to their supply regulator :- static struct regulator_init_data regulator1_data = { .constraints = { + .name = "Regulator-1", .min_uV = 3300000, .max_uV = 3300000, .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, @@ -51,13 +52,19 @@ static struct regulator_init_data regulator1_data = { .consumer_supplies = regulator1_consumers, }; +The name field should be set to something that is usefully descriptive +for the board for configuration of supplies for other regulators and +for use in logging and other diagnostic output. Normally the name +used for the supply rail in the schematic is a good choice. If no +name is provided then the subsystem will choose one. + Regulator-1 supplies power to Regulator-2. This relationship must be registered with the core so that Regulator-1 is also enabled when Consumer A enables its supply (Regulator-2). The supply regulator is set by the supply_regulator -field below:- +field below and co:- static struct regulator_init_data regulator2_data = { - .supply_regulator = "regulator_name", + .supply_regulator = "Regulator-1", .constraints = { .min_uV = 1800000, .max_uV = 2000000, diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt index 6066e3a6b9a9..0e856088db7c 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt @@ -43,13 +43,18 @@ struct dev_pm_ops { ... }; -The ->runtime_suspend(), ->runtime_resume() and ->runtime_idle() callbacks are -executed by the PM core for either the device type, or the class (if the device -type's struct dev_pm_ops object does not exist), or the bus type (if the -device type's and class' struct dev_pm_ops objects do not exist) of the given -device (this allows device types to override callbacks provided by bus types or -classes if necessary). The bus type, device type and class callbacks are -referred to as subsystem-level callbacks in what follows. +The ->runtime_suspend(), ->runtime_resume() and ->runtime_idle() callbacks +are executed by the PM core for either the power domain, or the device type +(if the device power domain's struct dev_pm_ops does not exist), or the class +(if the device power domain's and type's struct dev_pm_ops object does not +exist), or the bus type (if the device power domain's, type's and class' +struct dev_pm_ops objects do not exist) of the given device, so the priority +order of callbacks from high to low is that power domain callbacks, device +type callbacks, class callbacks and bus type callbacks, and the high priority +one will take precedence over low priority one. The bus type, device type and +class callbacks are referred to as subsystem-level callbacks in what follows, +and generally speaking, the power domain callbacks are used for representing +power domains within a SoC. By default, the callbacks are always invoked in process context with interrupts enabled. However, subsystems can use the pm_runtime_irq_safe() helper function @@ -477,12 +482,14 @@ pm_runtime_autosuspend_expiration() If pm_runtime_irq_safe() has been called for a device then the following helper functions may also be used in interrupt context: +pm_runtime_idle() pm_runtime_suspend() pm_runtime_autosuspend() pm_runtime_resume() pm_runtime_get_sync() pm_runtime_put_sync() pm_runtime_put_sync_suspend() +pm_runtime_put_sync_autosuspend() 5. Runtime PM Initialization, Device Probing and Removal diff --git a/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt b/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f28f9a6f0347 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt @@ -0,0 +1,275 @@ +Interaction of Suspend code (S3) with the CPU hotplug infrastructure + + (C) 2011 Srivatsa S. Bhat <srivatsa.bhat@linux.vnet.ibm.com> + + +I. How does the regular CPU hotplug code differ from how the Suspend-to-RAM + infrastructure uses it internally? And where do they share common code? + +Well, a picture is worth a thousand words... So ASCII art follows :-) + +[This depicts the current design in the kernel, and focusses only on the +interactions involving the freezer and CPU hotplug and also tries to explain +the locking involved. It outlines the notifications involved as well. +But please note that here, only the call paths are illustrated, with the aim +of describing where they take different paths and where they share code. +What happens when regular CPU hotplug and Suspend-to-RAM race with each other +is not depicted here.] + +On a high level, the suspend-resume cycle goes like this: + +|Freeze| -> |Disable nonboot| -> |Do suspend| -> |Enable nonboot| -> |Thaw | +|tasks | | cpus | | | | cpus | |tasks| + + +More details follow: + + Suspend call path + ----------------- + + Write 'mem' to + /sys/power/state + syfs file + | + v + Acquire pm_mutex lock + | + v + Send PM_SUSPEND_PREPARE + notifications + | + v + Freeze tasks + | + | + v + disable_nonboot_cpus() + /* start */ + | + v + Acquire cpu_add_remove_lock + | + v + Iterate over CURRENTLY + online CPUs + | + | + | ---------- + v | L + ======> _cpu_down() | + | [This takes cpuhotplug.lock | + Common | before taking down the CPU | + code | and releases it when done] | O + | While it is at it, notifications | + | are sent when notable events occur, | + ======> by running all registered callbacks. | + | | O + | | + | | + v | + Note down these cpus in | P + frozen_cpus mask ---------- + | + v + Disable regular cpu hotplug + by setting cpu_hotplug_disabled=1 + | + v + Release cpu_add_remove_lock + | + v + /* disable_nonboot_cpus() complete */ + | + v + Do suspend + + + +Resuming back is likewise, with the counterparts being (in the order of +execution during resume): +* enable_nonboot_cpus() which involves: + | Acquire cpu_add_remove_lock + | Reset cpu_hotplug_disabled to 0, thereby enabling regular cpu hotplug + | Call _cpu_up() [for all those cpus in the frozen_cpus mask, in a loop] + | Release cpu_add_remove_lock + v + +* thaw tasks +* send PM_POST_SUSPEND notifications +* Release pm_mutex lock. + + +It is to be noted here that the pm_mutex lock is acquired at the very +beginning, when we are just starting out to suspend, and then released only +after the entire cycle is complete (i.e., suspend + resume). + + + + Regular CPU hotplug call path + ----------------------------- + + Write 0 (or 1) to + /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu*/online + sysfs file + | + | + v + cpu_down() + | + v + Acquire cpu_add_remove_lock + | + v + If cpu_hotplug_disabled is 1 + return gracefully + | + | + v + ======> _cpu_down() + | [This takes cpuhotplug.lock + Common | before taking down the CPU + code | and releases it when done] + | While it is at it, notifications + | are sent when notable events occur, + ======> by running all registered callbacks. + | + | + v + Release cpu_add_remove_lock + [That's it!, for + regular CPU hotplug] + + + +So, as can be seen from the two diagrams (the parts marked as "Common code"), +regular CPU hotplug and the suspend code path converge at the _cpu_down() and +_cpu_up() functions. They differ in the arguments passed to these functions, +in that during regular CPU hotplug, 0 is passed for the 'tasks_frozen' +argument. But during suspend, since the tasks are already frozen by the time +the non-boot CPUs are offlined or onlined, the _cpu_*() functions are called +with the 'tasks_frozen' argument set to 1. +[See below for some known issues regarding this.] + + +Important files and functions/entry points: +------------------------------------------ + +kernel/power/process.c : freeze_processes(), thaw_processes() +kernel/power/suspend.c : suspend_prepare(), suspend_enter(), suspend_finish() +kernel/cpu.c: cpu_[up|down](), _cpu_[up|down](), [disable|enable]_nonboot_cpus() + + + +II. What are the issues involved in CPU hotplug? + ------------------------------------------- + +There are some interesting situations involving CPU hotplug and microcode +update on the CPUs, as discussed below: + +[Please bear in mind that the kernel requests the microcode images from +userspace, using the request_firmware() function defined in +drivers/base/firmware_class.c] + + +a. When all the CPUs are identical: + + This is the most common situation and it is quite straightforward: we want + to apply the same microcode revision to each of the CPUs. + To give an example of x86, the collect_cpu_info() function defined in + arch/x86/kernel/microcode_core.c helps in discovering the type of the CPU + and thereby in applying the correct microcode revision to it. + But note that the kernel does not maintain a common microcode image for the + all CPUs, in order to handle case 'b' described below. + + +b. When some of the CPUs are different than the rest: + + In this case since we probably need to apply different microcode revisions + to different CPUs, the kernel maintains a copy of the correct microcode + image for each CPU (after appropriate CPU type/model discovery using + functions such as collect_cpu_info()). + + +c. When a CPU is physically hot-unplugged and a new (and possibly different + type of) CPU is hot-plugged into the system: + + In the current design of the kernel, whenever a CPU is taken offline during + a regular CPU hotplug operation, upon receiving the CPU_DEAD notification + (which is sent by the CPU hotplug code), the microcode update driver's + callback for that event reacts by freeing the kernel's copy of the + microcode image for that CPU. + + Hence, when a new CPU is brought online, since the kernel finds that it + doesn't have the microcode image, it does the CPU type/model discovery + afresh and then requests the userspace for the appropriate microcode image + for that CPU, which is subsequently applied. + + For example, in x86, the mc_cpu_callback() function (which is the microcode + update driver's callback registered for CPU hotplug events) calls + microcode_update_cpu() which would call microcode_init_cpu() in this case, + instead of microcode_resume_cpu() when it finds that the kernel doesn't + have a valid microcode image. This ensures that the CPU type/model + discovery is performed and the right microcode is applied to the CPU after + getting it from userspace. + + +d. Handling microcode update during suspend/hibernate: + + Strictly speaking, during a CPU hotplug operation which does not involve + physically removing or inserting CPUs, the CPUs are not actually powered + off during a CPU offline. They are just put to the lowest C-states possible. + Hence, in such a case, it is not really necessary to re-apply microcode + when the CPUs are brought back online, since they wouldn't have lost the + image during the CPU offline operation. + + This is the usual scenario encountered during a resume after a suspend. + However, in the case of hibernation, since all the CPUs are completely + powered off, during restore it becomes necessary to apply the microcode + images to all the CPUs. + + [Note that we don't expect someone to physically pull out nodes and insert + nodes with a different type of CPUs in-between a suspend-resume or a + hibernate/restore cycle.] + + In the current design of the kernel however, during a CPU offline operation + as part of the suspend/hibernate cycle (the CPU_DEAD_FROZEN notification), + the existing copy of microcode image in the kernel is not freed up. + And during the CPU online operations (during resume/restore), since the + kernel finds that it already has copies of the microcode images for all the + CPUs, it just applies them to the CPUs, avoiding any re-discovery of CPU + type/model and the need for validating whether the microcode revisions are + right for the CPUs or not (due to the above assumption that physical CPU + hotplug will not be done in-between suspend/resume or hibernate/restore + cycles). + + +III. Are there any known problems when regular CPU hotplug and suspend race + with each other? + +Yes, they are listed below: + +1. When invoking regular CPU hotplug, the 'tasks_frozen' argument passed to + the _cpu_down() and _cpu_up() functions is *always* 0. + This might not reflect the true current state of the system, since the + tasks could have been frozen by an out-of-band event such as a suspend + operation in progress. Hence, it will lead to wrong notifications being + sent during the cpu online/offline events (eg, CPU_ONLINE notification + instead of CPU_ONLINE_FROZEN) which in turn will lead to execution of + inappropriate code by the callbacks registered for such CPU hotplug events. + +2. If a regular CPU hotplug stress test happens to race with the freezer due + to a suspend operation in progress at the same time, then we could hit the + situation described below: + + * A regular cpu online operation continues its journey from userspace + into the kernel, since the freezing has not yet begun. + * Then freezer gets to work and freezes userspace. + * If cpu online has not yet completed the microcode update stuff by now, + it will now start waiting on the frozen userspace in the + TASK_UNINTERRUPTIBLE state, in order to get the microcode image. + * Now the freezer continues and tries to freeze the remaining tasks. But + due to this wait mentioned above, the freezer won't be able to freeze + the cpu online hotplug task and hence freezing of tasks fails. + + As a result of this task freezing failure, the suspend operation gets + aborted. diff --git a/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt b/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt index 1101bee4e822..0e870825c1b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt @@ -77,7 +77,8 @@ SNAPSHOT_SET_SWAP_AREA - set the resume partition and the offset (in <PAGE_SIZE> resume_swap_area, as defined in kernel/power/suspend_ioctls.h, containing the resume device specification and the offset); for swap partitions the offset is always 0, but it is different from zero for - swap files (see Documentation/swsusp-and-swap-files.txt for details). + swap files (see Documentation/power/swsusp-and-swap-files.txt for + details). SNAPSHOT_PLATFORM_SUPPORT - enable/disable the hibernation platform support, depending on the argument value (enable, if the argument is nonzero) diff --git a/Documentation/rfkill.txt b/Documentation/rfkill.txt index 83668e5dd17f..03c9d9299c6b 100644 --- a/Documentation/rfkill.txt +++ b/Documentation/rfkill.txt @@ -117,5 +117,4 @@ The contents of these variables corresponds to the "name", "state" and "type" sysfs files explained above. -For further details consult Documentation/ABI/stable/dev-rfkill and -Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-rfkill. +For further details consult Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-rfkill. diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-bwc.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-bwc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f6b1873f68ab --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-bwc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ +CFS Bandwidth Control +===================== + +[ This document only discusses CPU bandwidth control for SCHED_NORMAL. + The SCHED_RT case is covered in Documentation/scheduler/sched-rt-group.txt ] + +CFS bandwidth control is a CONFIG_FAIR_GROUP_SCHED extension which allows the +specification of the maximum CPU bandwidth available to a group or hierarchy. + +The bandwidth allowed for a group is specified using a quota and period. Within +each given "period" (microseconds), a group is allowed to consume only up to +"quota" microseconds of CPU time. When the CPU bandwidth consumption of a +group exceeds this limit (for that period), the tasks belonging to its +hierarchy will be throttled and are not allowed to run again until the next +period. + +A group's unused runtime is globally tracked, being refreshed with quota units +above at each period boundary. As threads consume this bandwidth it is +transferred to cpu-local "silos" on a demand basis. The amount transferred +within each of these updates is tunable and described as the "slice". + +Management +---------- +Quota and period are managed within the cpu subsystem via cgroupfs. + +cpu.cfs_quota_us: the total available run-time within a period (in microseconds) +cpu.cfs_period_us: the length of a period (in microseconds) +cpu.stat: exports throttling statistics [explained further below] + +The default values are: + cpu.cfs_period_us=100ms + cpu.cfs_quota=-1 + +A value of -1 for cpu.cfs_quota_us indicates that the group does not have any +bandwidth restriction in place, such a group is described as an unconstrained +bandwidth group. This represents the traditional work-conserving behavior for +CFS. + +Writing any (valid) positive value(s) will enact the specified bandwidth limit. +The minimum quota allowed for the quota or period is 1ms. There is also an +upper bound on the period length of 1s. Additional restrictions exist when +bandwidth limits are used in a hierarchical fashion, these are explained in +more detail below. + +Writing any negative value to cpu.cfs_quota_us will remove the bandwidth limit +and return the group to an unconstrained state once more. + +Any updates to a group's bandwidth specification will result in it becoming +unthrottled if it is in a constrained state. + +System wide settings +-------------------- +For efficiency run-time is transferred between the global pool and CPU local +"silos" in a batch fashion. This greatly reduces global accounting pressure +on large systems. The amount transferred each time such an update is required +is described as the "slice". + +This is tunable via procfs: + /proc/sys/kernel/sched_cfs_bandwidth_slice_us (default=5ms) + +Larger slice values will reduce transfer overheads, while smaller values allow +for more fine-grained consumption. + +Statistics +---------- +A group's bandwidth statistics are exported via 3 fields in cpu.stat. + +cpu.stat: +- nr_periods: Number of enforcement intervals that have elapsed. +- nr_throttled: Number of times the group has been throttled/limited. +- throttled_time: The total time duration (in nanoseconds) for which entities + of the group have been throttled. + +This interface is read-only. + +Hierarchical considerations +--------------------------- +The interface enforces that an individual entity's bandwidth is always +attainable, that is: max(c_i) <= C. However, over-subscription in the +aggregate case is explicitly allowed to enable work-conserving semantics +within a hierarchy. + e.g. \Sum (c_i) may exceed C +[ Where C is the parent's bandwidth, and c_i its children ] + + +There are two ways in which a group may become throttled: + a. it fully consumes its own quota within a period + b. a parent's quota is fully consumed within its period + +In case b) above, even though the child may have runtime remaining it will not +be allowed to until the parent's runtime is refreshed. + +Examples +-------- +1. Limit a group to 1 CPU worth of runtime. + + If period is 250ms and quota is also 250ms, the group will get + 1 CPU worth of runtime every 250ms. + + # echo 250000 > cpu.cfs_quota_us /* quota = 250ms */ + # echo 250000 > cpu.cfs_period_us /* period = 250ms */ + +2. Limit a group to 2 CPUs worth of runtime on a multi-CPU machine. + + With 500ms period and 1000ms quota, the group can get 2 CPUs worth of + runtime every 500ms. + + # echo 1000000 > cpu.cfs_quota_us /* quota = 1000ms */ + # echo 500000 > cpu.cfs_period_us /* period = 500ms */ + + The larger period here allows for increased burst capacity. + +3. Limit a group to 20% of 1 CPU. + + With 50ms period, 10ms quota will be equivalent to 20% of 1 CPU. + + # echo 10000 > cpu.cfs_quota_us /* quota = 10ms */ + # echo 50000 > cpu.cfs_period_us /* period = 50ms */ + + By using a small period here we are ensuring a consistent latency + response at the expense of burst capacity. + diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX b/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX index c2e18e109858..b48ded55b555 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX @@ -28,6 +28,8 @@ LICENSE.FlashPoint - Licence of the Flashpoint driver LICENSE.qla2xxx - License for QLogic Linux Fibre Channel HBA Driver firmware. +LICENSE.qla4xxx + - License for QLogic Linux iSCSI HBA Driver. Mylex.txt - info on driver for Mylex adapters NinjaSCSI.txt diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas index 1b6e27ddb7f3..64adb98b181c 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas @@ -1,3 +1,18 @@ +Release Date : Wed. Oct 5, 2011 17:00:00 PST 2010 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 00.00.06.12-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.05.40-rc1 + 1. Continue booting immediately if FW in FAULT at driver load time. + 2. Increase default cmds per lun to 256. + 3. Fix mismatch in megasas_reset_fusion() mutex lock-unlock. + 4. Remove some un-necessary code. + 5. Clear state change interrupts for Fusion/Invader. + 6. Clear FUSION_IN_RESET before enabling interrupts. + 7. Add support for MegaRAID 9360/9380 12GB/s controllers. + 8. Add multiple MSI-X vector/multiple reply queue support. + 9. Add driver workaround for PERC5/1068 kdump kernel panic. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Release Date : Tue. Jul 26, 2011 17:00:00 PST 2010 - (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) Adam Radford diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla4xxx b/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla4xxx new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..494980e40491 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla4xxx @@ -0,0 +1,310 @@ +Copyright (c) 2003-2011 QLogic Corporation +QLogic Linux iSCSI HBA Driver + +This program includes a device driver for Linux 3.x. +You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the +GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as +Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2). + +REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE, +THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY +EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE +IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR +BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, +EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED +TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, +DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON +ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, +OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY +OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. + +USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT +CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR +OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT, +TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN +ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN +COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM. + + +EXHIBIT A + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 + + Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + + 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + + 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices + stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in + whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any + part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third + parties under the terms of this License. + + c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively + when run, you must cause it, when started running for such + interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an + announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a + notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide + a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under + these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this + License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but + does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on + the Program is not required to print an announcement.) + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + + 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + + a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable + source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections + 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + + b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three + years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your + cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete + machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be + distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium + customarily used for software interchange; or, + + c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer + to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is + allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you + received the program in object code or executable form with such + an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + + 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + + 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + + 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + + 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any +later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + + 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + + NO WARRANTY + + 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx_old.txt b/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx_old.txt index 7bd210ab45a1..ecfc474f36a8 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx_old.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx_old.txt @@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ linux-1.1.x and fairly stable since linux-1.2.x, and are also in FreeBSD Kernel Compile options ------------------------------ The various kernel compile time options for this driver are now fairly - well documented in the file Documentation/Configure.help. In order to + well documented in the file drivers/scsi/Kconfig. In order to see this documentation, you need to use one of the advanced configuration programs (menuconfig and xconfig). If you are using the "make menuconfig" method of configuring your kernel, then you would simply highlight the diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/bnx2fc.txt b/Documentation/scsi/bnx2fc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..80823556d62f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/bnx2fc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +Operating FCoE using bnx2fc +=========================== +Broadcom FCoE offload through bnx2fc is full stateful hardware offload that +cooperates with all interfaces provided by the Linux ecosystem for FC/FCoE and +SCSI controllers. As such, FCoE functionality, once enabled is largely +transparent. Devices discovered on the SAN will be registered and unregistered +automatically with the upper storage layers. + +Despite the fact that the Broadcom's FCoE offload is fully offloaded, it does +depend on the state of the network interfaces to operate. As such, the network +interface (e.g. eth0) associated with the FCoE offload initiator must be 'up'. +It is recommended that the network interfaces be configured to be brought up +automatically at boot time. + +Furthermore, the Broadcom FCoE offload solution creates VLAN interfaces to +support the VLANs that have been discovered for FCoE operation (e.g. +eth0.1001-fcoe). Do not delete or disable these interfaces or FCoE operation +will be disrupted. + +Driver Usage Model: +=================== + +1. Ensure that fcoe-utils package is installed. + +2. Configure the interfaces on which bnx2fc driver has to operate on. +Here are the steps to configure: + a. cd /etc/fcoe + b. copy cfg-ethx to cfg-eth5 if FCoE has to be enabled on eth5. + c. Repeat this for all the interfaces where FCoE has to be enabled. + d. Edit all the cfg-eth files to set "no" for DCB_REQUIRED** field, and + "yes" for AUTO_VLAN. + e. Other configuration parameters should be left as default + +3. Ensure that "bnx2fc" is in SUPPORTED_DRIVERS list in /etc/fcoe/config. + +4. Start fcoe service. (service fcoe start). If Broadcom devices are present in +the system, bnx2fc driver would automatically claim the interfaces, starts vlan +discovery and log into the targets. + +5. "Symbolic Name" in 'fcoeadm -i' output would display if bnx2fc has claimed +the interface. +Eg: +[root@bh2 ~]# fcoeadm -i + Description: NetXtreme II BCM57712 10 Gigabit Ethernet + Revision: 01 + Manufacturer: Broadcom Corporation + Serial Number: 0010186FD558 + Driver: bnx2x 1.70.00-0 + Number of Ports: 2 + + Symbolic Name: bnx2fc v1.0.5 over eth5.4 + OS Device Name: host11 + Node Name: 0x10000010186FD559 + Port Name: 0x20000010186FD559 + FabricName: 0x2001000DECB3B681 + Speed: 10 Gbit + Supported Speed: 10 Gbit + MaxFrameSize: 2048 + FC-ID (Port ID): 0x0F0377 + State: Online + +6. Verify the vlan discovery is performed by running ifconfig and notice +<INTERFACE>.<VLAN>-fcoe interfaces are automatically created. + +Refer to fcoeadm manpage for more information on fcoeadm operations to +create/destroy interfaces or to display lun/target information. + +NOTE: +==== +** Broadcom FCoE capable devices implement a DCBX/LLDP client on-chip. Only one +LLDP client is allowed per interface. For proper operation all host software +based DCBX/LLDP clients (e.g. lldpad) must be disabled. To disable lldpad on a +given interface, run the following command: + +lldptool set-lldp -i <interface_name> adminStatus=disabled diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt index 5f17d29c59b5..a340b18cd4eb 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt @@ -55,11 +55,6 @@ or in the same directory as the C source code. For example to find a url about the USB mass storage driver see the /usr/src/linux/drivers/usb/storage directory. -The Linux kernel source Documentation/DocBook/scsidrivers.tmpl file -refers to this file. With the appropriate DocBook tool-set, this permits -users to generate html, ps and pdf renderings of information within this -file (e.g. the interface functions). - Driver structure ================ Traditionally an LLD for the SCSI subsystem has been at least two files in diff --git a/Documentation/security/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt b/Documentation/security/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt index 5f50ccabfc8a..c9e4855ed3d7 100644 --- a/Documentation/security/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt +++ b/Documentation/security/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt @@ -156,4 +156,5 @@ Load an encrypted key "evm" from saved blob: Other uses for trusted and encrypted keys, such as for disk and file encryption are anticipated. In particular the new format 'ecryptfs' has been defined in in order to use encrypted keys to mount an eCryptfs filesystem. More details -about the usage can be found in the file 'Documentation/keys-ecryptfs.txt'. +about the usage can be found in the file +'Documentation/security/keys-ecryptfs.txt'. diff --git a/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt index a4932387bbfb..079cb3df62cf 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt @@ -28,6 +28,10 @@ RS485 communications. This data structure is used to set and configure RS485 parameters in the platform data and in ioctls. + The device tree can also provide RS485 boot time parameters (see [2] + for bindings). The driver is in charge of filling this data structure from + the values given by the device tree. + Any driver for devices capable of working both as RS232 and RS485 should provide at least the following ioctls: @@ -104,6 +108,9 @@ rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RTS_AFTER_SEND; rs485conf.delay_rts_after_send = ...; + /* Set this flag if you want to receive data even whilst sending data */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RX_DURING_TX; + if (ioctl (fd, TIOCSRS485, &rs485conf) < 0) { /* Error handling. See errno. */ } @@ -118,3 +125,4 @@ 5. REFERENCES [1] include/linux/serial.h + [2] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 89757012c7ff..936699e4f04b 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -886,6 +886,12 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. disable) power_save_controller - Reset HD-audio controller in power-saving mode (default = on) + align_buffer_size - Force rounding of buffer/period sizes to multiples + of 128 bytes. This is more efficient in terms of memory + access but isn't required by the HDA spec and prevents + users from specifying exact period/buffer sizes. + (default = on) + snoop - Enable/disable snooping (default = on) This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe. diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Controls.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Controls.txt index 1482035243e6..e9621e349e17 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Controls.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Controls.txt @@ -98,3 +98,19 @@ Conexant codecs * Auto-Mute Mode See Reatek codecs. + + +Analog codecs +-------------- + +* Channel Mode + This is an enum control to change the surround-channel setup, + appears only when the surround channels are available. + It gives the number of channels to be used, "2ch", "4ch" and "6ch". + According to the configuration, this also controls the + jack-retasking of multi-I/O jacks. + +* Independent HP + When this enum control is enabled, the headphone output is routed + from an individual stream (the third PCM such as hw:0,2) instead of + the primary stream. diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index d70c93bdcadf..4f3443230d89 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -29,9 +29,6 @@ ALC880 ALC260 ====== - hp HP machines - hp-3013 HP machines (3013-variant) - hp-dc7600 HP DC7600 fujitsu Fujitsu S7020 acer Acer TravelMate will Will laptops (PB V7900) @@ -46,15 +43,10 @@ ALC260 ALC262 ====== fujitsu Fujitsu Laptop - hp-bpc HP xw4400/6400/8400/9400 laptops - hp-bpc-d7000 HP BPC D7000 - hp-tc-t5735 HP Thin Client T5735 - hp-rp5700 HP RP5700 benq Benq ED8 benq-t31 Benq T31 hippo Hippo (ATI) with jack detection, Sony UX-90s hippo_1 Hippo (Benq) with jack detection - sony-assamd Sony ASSAMD toshiba-s06 Toshiba S06 toshiba-rx1 Toshiba RX1 tyan Tyan Thunder n6650W (S2915-E) @@ -66,43 +58,15 @@ ALC262 ALC267/268 ========== - quanta-il1 Quanta IL1 mini-notebook - 3stack 3-stack model - toshiba Toshiba A205 - acer Acer laptops - acer-dmic Acer laptops with digital-mic - acer-aspire Acer Aspire One - dell Dell OEM laptops (Vostro 1200) - zepto Zepto laptops - test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can - adjusted. Appearing only when compiled with - $CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + N/A ALC269 ====== - basic Basic preset - quanta Quanta FL1 laptop-amic Laptops with analog-mic input laptop-dmic Laptops with digital-mic input - fujitsu FSC Amilo - lifebook Fujitsu Lifebook S6420 - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) ALC662/663/272 ============== - 3stack-dig 3-stack (2-channel) with SPDIF - 3stack-6ch 3-stack (6-channel) - 3stack-6ch-dig 3-stack (6-channel) with SPDIF - 5stack-dig 5-stack with SPDIF - lenovo-101e Lenovo laptop - eeepc-p701 ASUS Eeepc P701 - eeepc-ep20 ASUS Eeepc EP20 - ecs ECS/Foxconn mobo - m51va ASUS M51VA - g71v ASUS G71V - h13 ASUS H13 - g50v ASUS G50V asus-mode1 ASUS asus-mode2 ASUS asus-mode3 ASUS @@ -111,15 +75,10 @@ ALC662/663/272 asus-mode6 ASUS asus-mode7 ASUS asus-mode8 ASUS - dell Dell with ALC272 - dell-zm1 Dell ZM1 with ALC272 - samsung-nc10 Samsung NC10 mini notebook - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) ALC680 ====== - base Base model (ASUS NX90) - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + N/A ALC882/883/885/888/889 ====================== @@ -175,28 +134,11 @@ ALC882/883/885/888/889 ALC861/660 ========== - 3stack 3-jack - 3stack-dig 3-jack with SPDIF I/O - 6stack-dig 6-jack with SPDIF I/O - 3stack-660 3-jack (for ALC660) - uniwill-m31 Uniwill M31 laptop - toshiba Toshiba laptop support - asus Asus laptop support - asus-laptop ASUS F2/F3 laptops - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + N/A ALC861VD/660VD ============== - 3stack 3-jack - 3stack-dig 3-jack with SPDIF OUT - 6stack-dig 6-jack with SPDIF OUT - 3stack-660 3-jack (for ALC660VD) - 3stack-660-digout 3-jack with SPDIF OUT (for ALC660VD) - lenovo Lenovo 3000 C200 - dallas Dallas laptops - hp HP TX1000 - asus-v1s ASUS V1Sn - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + N/A CMI9880 ======= @@ -289,7 +231,6 @@ Conexant 5051 hp-dv6736 HP dv6736 hp-f700 HP Compaq Presario F700 ideapad Lenovo IdeaPad laptop - lenovo-x200 Lenovo X200 laptop toshiba Toshiba Satellite M300 Conexant 5066 diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt index c82beb007634..03e2771ddeef 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt @@ -447,7 +447,10 @@ The file needs to have a line `[codec]`. The next line should contain three numbers indicating the codec vendor-id (0x12345678 in the example), the codec subsystem-id (0xabcd1234) and the address (2) of the codec. The rest patch entries are applied to this specified codec -until another codec entry is given. +until another codec entry is given. Passing 0 or a negative number to +the first or the second value will make the check of the corresponding +field be skipped. It'll be useful for really broken devices that don't +initialize SSID properly. The `[model]` line allows to change the model name of the each codec. In the example above, it will be changed to model=auto. @@ -491,7 +494,7 @@ Also, the codec chip name can be rewritten via `[chip_name]` line. The hd-audio driver reads the file via request_firmware(). Thus, a patch file has to be located on the appropriate firmware path, typically, /lib/firmware. For example, when you pass the option -`patch=hda-init.fw`, the file /lib/firmware/hda-init-fw must be +`patch=hda-init.fw`, the file /lib/firmware/hda-init.fw must be present. The patch module option is specific to each card instance, and you @@ -524,6 +527,54 @@ power-saving. See /sys/module/snd_hda_intel/parameters/power_save to check the current value. If it's non-zero, the feature is turned on. +Tracepoints +~~~~~~~~~~~ +The hd-audio driver gives a few basic tracepoints. +`hda:hda_send_cmd` traces each CORB write while `hda:hda_get_response` +traces the response from RIRB (only when read from the codec driver). +`hda:hda_bus_reset` traces the bus-reset due to fatal error, etc, +`hda:hda_unsol_event` traces the unsolicited events, and +`hda:hda_power_down` and `hda:hda_power_up` trace the power down/up +via power-saving behavior. + +Enabling all tracepoints can be done like +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/hda/enable +------------------------------------------------------------------------ +then after some commands, you can traces from +/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace file. For example, when you want to +trace what codec command is sent, enable the tracepoint like: +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + # tracer: nop + # + # TASK-PID CPU# TIMESTAMP FUNCTION + # | | | | | + <...>-7807 [002] 105147.774889: hda_send_cmd: [0:0] val=e3a019 + <...>-7807 [002] 105147.774893: hda_send_cmd: [0:0] val=e39019 + <...>-7807 [002] 105147.999542: hda_send_cmd: [0:0] val=e3a01a + <...>-7807 [002] 105147.999543: hda_send_cmd: [0:0] val=e3901a + <...>-26764 [001] 349222.837143: hda_send_cmd: [0:0] val=e3a019 + <...>-26764 [001] 349222.837148: hda_send_cmd: [0:0] val=e39019 + <...>-26764 [001] 349223.058539: hda_send_cmd: [0:0] val=e3a01a + <...>-26764 [001] 349223.058541: hda_send_cmd: [0:0] val=e3901a +------------------------------------------------------------------------ +Here `[0:0]` indicates the card number and the codec address, and +`val` shows the value sent to the codec, respectively. The value is +a packed value, and you can decode it via hda-decode-verb program +included in hda-emu package below. For example, the value e3a019 is +to set the left output-amp value to 25. +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + % hda-decode-verb 0xe3a019 + raw value = 0x00e3a019 + cid = 0, nid = 0x0e, verb = 0x3a0, parm = 0x19 + raw value: verb = 0x3a0, parm = 0x19 + verbname = set_amp_gain_mute + amp raw val = 0xa019 + output, left, idx=0, mute=0, val=25 +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Development Tree ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ The latest development codes for HD-audio are found on sound git tree: diff --git a/Documentation/sound/oss/PAS16 b/Documentation/sound/oss/PAS16 index 951b3dce51b4..3dca4b75988e 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/oss/PAS16 +++ b/Documentation/sound/oss/PAS16 @@ -60,8 +60,7 @@ With PAS16 you can use two audio device files at the same time. /dev/dsp (and The new stuff for 2.3.99 and later ============================================================================ -The following configuration options from Documentation/Configure.help -are relevant to configuring the PAS16: +The following configuration options are relevant to configuring the PAS16: Sound card support CONFIG_SOUND diff --git a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx index 00511e08db78..3352f97430e4 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx +++ b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ PXA2xx SPI on SSP driver HOWTO =================================================== This a mini howto on the pxa2xx_spi driver. The driver turns a PXA2xx synchronous serial port into a SPI master controller -(see Documentation/spi/spi_summary). The driver has the following features +(see Documentation/spi/spi-summary). The driver has the following features - Support for any PXA2xx SSP - SSP PIO and SSP DMA data transfers. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Declaring Slave Devices ----------------------- Typically each SPI slave (chip) is defined in the arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c using the "spi_board_info" structure found in "linux/spi/spi.h". See -"Documentation/spi/spi_summary" for additional information. +"Documentation/spi/spi-summary" for additional information. Each slave device attached to the PXA must provide slave specific configuration information via the structure "pxa2xx_spi_chip" found in diff --git a/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt b/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt index e213f45cf9d7..21fd05c28e73 100644 --- a/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt +++ b/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt @@ -24,10 +24,10 @@ Rules on what kind of patches are accepted, and which ones are not, into the Procedure for submitting patches to the -stable tree: - Send the patch, after verifying that it follows the above rules, to - stable@kernel.org. You must note the upstream commit ID in the changelog - of your submission. + stable@vger.kernel.org. You must note the upstream commit ID in the + changelog of your submission. - To have the patch automatically included in the stable tree, add the tag - Cc: stable@kernel.org + Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org in the sign-off area. Once the patch is merged it will be applied to the stable tree without anything else needing to be done by the author or subsystem maintainer. @@ -35,10 +35,10 @@ Procedure for submitting patches to the -stable tree: cherry-picked than this can be specified in the following format in the sign-off area: - Cc: <stable@kernel.org> # .32.x: a1f84a3: sched: Check for idle - Cc: <stable@kernel.org> # .32.x: 1b9508f: sched: Rate-limit newidle - Cc: <stable@kernel.org> # .32.x: fd21073: sched: Fix affinity logic - Cc: <stable@kernel.org> # .32.x + Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # .32.x: a1f84a3: sched: Check for idle + Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # .32.x: 1b9508f: sched: Rate-limit newidle + Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # .32.x: fd21073: sched: Fix affinity logic + Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # .32.x Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu> The tag sequence has the meaning of: diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index 704e474a93df..1f2463671a1a 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -24,6 +24,7 @@ show up in /proc/sys/kernel: - bootloader_type [ X86 only ] - bootloader_version [ X86 only ] - callhome [ S390 only ] +- cap_last_cap - core_pattern - core_pipe_limit - core_uses_pid @@ -155,6 +156,13 @@ on has a service contract with IBM. ============================================================== +cap_last_cap + +Highest valid capability of the running kernel. Exports +CAP_LAST_CAP from the kernel. + +============================================================== + core_pattern: core_pattern is used to specify a core dumpfile pattern name. diff --git a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt index 21332233cef1..e8789976e77c 100644 --- a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt +++ b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ hrtimer base infrastructure --------------------------- The hrtimer base infrastructure was merged into the 2.6.16 kernel. Details of -the base implementation are covered in Documentation/hrtimers/hrtimer.txt. See +the base implementation are covered in Documentation/timers/hrtimers.txt. See also figure #2 (OLS slides p. 15) The main differences to the timer wheel, which holds the armed timer_list type diff --git a/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl b/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl index 12cecc83cd91..4a37c4759cd2 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl +++ b/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl @@ -379,10 +379,10 @@ EVENT_PROCESS: # To closer match vmstat scanning statistics, only count isolate_both # and isolate_inactive as scanning. isolate_active is rotation - # isolate_inactive == 0 - # isolate_active == 1 - # isolate_both == 2 - if ($isolate_mode != 1) { + # isolate_inactive == 1 + # isolate_active == 2 + # isolate_both == 3 + if ($isolate_mode != 2) { $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_SCANNED} += $nr_scanned; } $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_CONTIG_DIRTY} += $nr_contig_dirty; diff --git a/Documentation/usb/dma.txt b/Documentation/usb/dma.txt index 84ef865237db..444651e70d95 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/dma.txt @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ API OVERVIEW The big picture is that USB drivers can continue to ignore most DMA issues, though they still must provide DMA-ready buffers (see -Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt). That's how they've worked through +Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt). That's how they've worked through the 2.4 (and earlier) kernels. OR: they can now be DMA-aware. @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ and effects like cache-trashing can impose subtle penalties. force a consistent memory access ordering by using memory barriers. It's not using a streaming DMA mapping, so it's good for small transfers on systems where the I/O would otherwise thrash an IOMMU mapping. (See - Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt for definitions of "coherent" and + Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt for definitions of "coherent" and "streaming" DMA mappings.) Asking for 1/Nth of a page (as well as asking for N pages) is reasonably @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ WORKING WITH EXISTING BUFFERS Existing buffers aren't usable for DMA without first being mapped into the DMA address space of the device. However, most buffers passed to your driver can safely be used with such DMA mapping. (See the first section -of Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt, titled "What memory is DMA-able?") +of Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt, titled "What memory is DMA-able?") - When you're using scatterlists, you can map everything at once. On some systems, this kicks in an IOMMU and turns the scatterlists into single diff --git a/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt b/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7b590edae145 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + TODO +~~~~~~ +Please pick something while reading :) + +- Convert interrupt handler to per-ep-thread-irq + + As it turns out some DWC3-commands ~1ms to complete. Currently we spin + until the command completes which is bad. + + Implementation idea: + - dwc core implements a demultiplexing irq chip for interrupts per + endpoint. The interrupt numbers are allocated during probe and belong + to the device. If MSI provides per-endpoint interrupt this dummy + interrupt chip can be replaced with "real" interrupts. + - interrupts are requested / allocated on usb_ep_enable() and removed on + usb_ep_disable(). Worst case are 32 interrupts, the lower limit is two + for ep0/1. + - dwc3_send_gadget_ep_cmd() will sleep in wait_for_completion_timeout() + until the command completes. + - the interrupt handler is split into the following pieces: + - primary handler of the device + goes through every event and calls generic_handle_irq() for event + it. On return from generic_handle_irq() in acknowledges the event + counter so interrupt goes away (eventually). + + - threaded handler of the device + none + + - primary handler of the EP-interrupt + reads the event and tries to process it. Everything that requries + sleeping is handed over to the Thread. The event is saved in an + per-endpoint data-structure. + We probably have to pay attention not to process events once we + handed something to thread so we don't process event X prio Y + where X > Y. + + - threaded handler of the EP-interrupt + handles the remaining EP work which might sleep such as waiting + for command completion. + + Latency: + There should be no increase in latency since the interrupt-thread has a + high priority and will be run before an average task in user land + (except the user changed priorities). diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt index c9ffa9ced7ee..12511c98cc4f 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt @@ -439,10 +439,10 @@ cause autosuspends to fail with -EBUSY if the driver needs to use the device. External suspend calls should never be allowed to fail in this way, -only autosuspend calls. The driver can tell them apart by checking -the PM_EVENT_AUTO bit in the message.event argument to the suspend -method; this bit will be set for internal PM events (autosuspend) and -clear for external PM events. +only autosuspend calls. The driver can tell them apart by applying +the PMSG_IS_AUTO() macro to the message argument to the suspend +method; it will return True for internal PM events (autosuspend) and +False for external PM events. Mutual exclusion @@ -487,3 +487,29 @@ succeed, it may still remain active and thus cause the system to resume as soon as the system suspend is complete. Or the remote wakeup may fail and get lost. Which outcome occurs depends on timing and on the hardware and firmware design. + + + xHCI hardware link PM + --------------------- + +xHCI host controller provides hardware link power management to usb2.0 +(xHCI 1.0 feature) and usb3.0 devices which support link PM. By +enabling hardware LPM, the host can automatically put the device into +lower power state(L1 for usb2.0 devices, or U1/U2 for usb3.0 devices), +which state device can enter and resume very quickly. + +The user interface for controlling USB2 hardware LPM is located in the +power/ subdirectory of each USB device's sysfs directory, that is, in +/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/ where "..." is the device's ID. The +relevant attribute files is usb2_hardware_lpm. + + power/usb2_hardware_lpm + + When a USB2 device which support LPM is plugged to a + xHCI host root hub which support software LPM, the + host will run a software LPM test for it; if the device + enters L1 state and resume successfully and the host + supports USB2 hardware LPM, this file will show up and + driver will enable hardware LPM for the device. You + can write y/Y/1 or n/N/0 to the file to enable/disable + USB2 hardware LPM manually. This is for test purpose mainly. diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tm6000 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tm6000 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b5edce487997 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tm6000 @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ + 1 -> Generic tm5600 board (tm5600) [6000:0001] + 2 -> Generic tm6000 board (tm6000) [6000:0001] + 3 -> Generic tm6010 board (tm6010) [6000:0002] + 4 -> 10Moons UT821 (tm5600) [6000:0001] + 5 -> 10Moons UT330 (tm5600) + 6 -> ADSTech Dual TV (tm6000) [06e1:f332] + 7 -> FreeCom and similar (tm6000) [14aa:0620] + 8 -> ADSTech Mini Dual TV (tm6000) [06e1:b339] + 9 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR-900H/USB2 Stick (tm6010) [2040:6600,2040:6601,2040:6610,2040:6611] + 10 -> Beholder Wander (tm6010) [6000:dec0] + 11 -> Beholder Voyager (tm6010) [6000:dec1] + 12 -> TerraTec Cinergy Hybrid XE/Cinergy Hybrid Stick (tm6010) [0ccd:0086,0ccd:00a5] + 13 -> TwinHan TU501 (tm6010) [13d3:3240,13d3:3241,13d3:3243,13d3:3264] + 14 -> Beholder Wander Lite (tm6010) [6000:dec2] + 15 -> Beholder Voyager Lite (tm6010) [6000:dec3] + diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 5bfa9a777d26..b15e29f31121 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ xxxx vend:prod ---- spca501 0000:0000 MystFromOri Unknown Camera spca508 0130:0130 Clone Digital Webcam 11043 +zc3xx 03f0:1b07 HP Premium Starter Cam m5602 0402:5602 ALi Video Camera Controller spca501 040a:0002 Kodak DVC-325 spca500 040a:0300 Kodak EZ200 @@ -190,6 +191,7 @@ ov519 05a9:0519 OV519 Microphone ov519 05a9:0530 OmniVision ov519 05a9:2800 OmniVision SuperCAM ov519 05a9:4519 Webcam Classic +ov534_9 05a9:8065 OmniVision test kit ov538+ov9712 ov519 05a9:8519 OmniVision ov519 05a9:a511 D-Link USB Digital Video Camera ov519 05a9:a518 D-Link DSB-C310 Webcam @@ -199,6 +201,8 @@ gl860 05e3:0503 Genesys Logic PC Camera gl860 05e3:f191 Genesys Logic PC Camera spca561 060b:a001 Maxell Compact Pc PM3 zc3xx 0698:2003 CTX M730V built in +topro 06a2:0003 TP6800 PC Camera, CmoX CX0342 webcam +topro 06a2:6810 Creative Qmax nw80x 06a5:0000 Typhoon Webcam 100 USB nw80x 06a5:d001 Divio based webcams nw80x 06a5:d800 Divio Chicony TwinkleCam, Trust SpaceCam diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt index 69be2c782b98..5dd1439b61fd 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt @@ -70,10 +70,11 @@ Events The OMAP 3 ISP driver does support the V4L2 event interface on CCDC and statistics (AEWB, AF and histogram) subdevs. -The CCDC subdev produces V4L2_EVENT_OMAP3ISP_HS_VS type event on HS_VS -interrupt which is used to signal frame start. The event is triggered exactly -when the reception of the first line of the frame starts in the CCDC module. -The event can be subscribed on the CCDC subdev. +The CCDC subdev produces V4L2_EVENT_FRAME_SYNC type event on HS_VS +interrupt which is used to signal frame start. Earlier version of this +driver used V4L2_EVENT_OMAP3ISP_HS_VS for this purpose. The event is +triggered exactly when the reception of the first line of the frame starts +in the CCDC module. The event can be subscribed on the CCDC subdev. (When using parallel interface one must pay account to correct configuration of the VS signal polarity. This is automatically correct when using the serial diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt index 9346fc8cbf2b..26aa0573933e 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt @@ -285,11 +285,11 @@ implement g_volatile_ctrl like this: Note that you use the 'new value' union as well in g_volatile_ctrl. In general controls that need to implement g_volatile_ctrl are read-only controls. -To mark a control as volatile you have to set the is_volatile flag: +To mark a control as volatile you have to set V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE: ctrl = v4l2_ctrl_new_std(&sd->ctrl_handler, ...); if (ctrl) - ctrl->is_volatile = 1; + ctrl->flags |= V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE; For try/s_ctrl the new values (i.e. as passed by the user) are filled in and you can modify them in try_ctrl or set them in s_ctrl. The 'cur' union @@ -367,8 +367,7 @@ Driver specific controls can be created using v4l2_ctrl_new_custom(): The last argument is the priv pointer which can be set to driver-specific private data. -The v4l2_ctrl_config struct also has fields to set the is_private and is_volatile -flags. +The v4l2_ctrl_config struct also has a field to set the is_private flag. If the name field is not set, then the framework will assume this is a standard control and will fill in the name, type and flags fields accordingly. @@ -496,18 +495,20 @@ Handling autogain/gain-type Controls with Auto Clusters A common type of control cluster is one that handles 'auto-foo/foo'-type controls. Typical examples are autogain/gain, autoexposure/exposure, -autowhitebalance/red balance/blue balance. In all cases you have one controls +autowhitebalance/red balance/blue balance. In all cases you have one control that determines whether another control is handled automatically by the hardware, or whether it is under manual control from the user. If the cluster is in automatic mode, then the manual controls should be -marked inactive. When the volatile controls are read the g_volatile_ctrl -operation should return the value that the hardware's automatic mode set up -automatically. +marked inactive and volatile. When the volatile controls are read the +g_volatile_ctrl operation should return the value that the hardware's automatic +mode set up automatically. If the cluster is put in manual mode, then the manual controls should become -active again and the is_volatile flag should be ignored (so g_volatile_ctrl is -no longer called while in manual mode). +active again and the volatile flag is cleared (so g_volatile_ctrl is no longer +called while in manual mode). In addition just before switching to manual mode +the current values as determined by the auto mode are copied as the new manual +values. Finally the V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_UPDATE should be set for the auto control since changing that control affects the control flags of the manual controls. @@ -520,7 +521,11 @@ void v4l2_ctrl_auto_cluster(unsigned ncontrols, struct v4l2_ctrl **controls, The first two arguments are identical to v4l2_ctrl_cluster. The third argument tells the framework which value switches the cluster into manual mode. The -last argument will optionally set the is_volatile flag for the non-auto controls. +last argument will optionally set V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE for the non-auto controls. +If it is false, then the manual controls are never volatile. You would typically +use that if the hardware does not give you the option to read back to values as +determined by the auto mode (e.g. if autogain is on, the hardware doesn't allow +you to obtain the current gain value). The first control of the cluster is assumed to be the 'auto' control. @@ -681,16 +686,6 @@ if there are no controls at all. count if nothing was done yet. If it is less than count then only the controls up to error_idx-1 were successfully applied. -3) When attempting to read a button control the framework will return -EACCES -instead of -EINVAL as stated in the spec. It seems to make more sense since -button controls are write-only controls. - -4) Attempting to write to a read-only control will return -EACCES instead of --EINVAL as the spec says. - -5) The spec does not mention what should happen when you try to set/get a -control class controls. The framework will return -EACCES. - Proposals for Extensions ======================== @@ -703,9 +698,3 @@ decimal. Useful for e.g. video_mute_yuv. 2) It is possible to mark in the controls array which controls have been successfully written and which failed by for example adding a bit to the control ID. Not sure if it is worth the effort, though. - -3) Trying to set volatile inactive controls should result in -EACCESS. - -4) Add a new flag to mark volatile controls. Any application that wants -to store the state of the controls can then skip volatile inactive controls. -Currently it is not possible to detect such controls. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt index b0e4b9cd6a66..7945b0bd35e2 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt @@ -175,10 +175,30 @@ Parameters: vcpu id (apic id on x86) Returns: vcpu fd on success, -1 on error This API adds a vcpu to a virtual machine. The vcpu id is a small integer -in the range [0, max_vcpus). You can use KVM_CAP_NR_VCPUS of the -KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION ioctl() to determine the value for max_vcpus at run-time. +in the range [0, max_vcpus). + +The recommended max_vcpus value can be retrieved using the KVM_CAP_NR_VCPUS of +the KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION ioctl() at run-time. +The maximum possible value for max_vcpus can be retrieved using the +KVM_CAP_MAX_VCPUS of the KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION ioctl() at run-time. + If the KVM_CAP_NR_VCPUS does not exist, you should assume that max_vcpus is 4 cpus max. +If the KVM_CAP_MAX_VCPUS does not exist, you should assume that max_vcpus is +same as the value returned from KVM_CAP_NR_VCPUS. + +On powerpc using book3s_hv mode, the vcpus are mapped onto virtual +threads in one or more virtual CPU cores. (This is because the +hardware requires all the hardware threads in a CPU core to be in the +same partition.) The KVM_CAP_PPC_SMT capability indicates the number +of vcpus per virtual core (vcore). The vcore id is obtained by +dividing the vcpu id by the number of vcpus per vcore. The vcpus in a +given vcore will always be in the same physical core as each other +(though that might be a different physical core from time to time). +Userspace can control the threading (SMT) mode of the guest by its +allocation of vcpu ids. For example, if userspace wants +single-threaded guest vcpus, it should make all vcpu ids be a multiple +of the number of vcpus per vcore. On powerpc using book3s_hv mode, the vcpus are mapped onto virtual threads in one or more virtual CPU cores. (This is because the @@ -1633,3 +1653,50 @@ developer registration required to access it). char padding[256]; }; }; + +6. Capabilities that can be enabled + +There are certain capabilities that change the behavior of the virtual CPU when +enabled. To enable them, please see section 4.37. Below you can find a list of +capabilities and what their effect on the vCPU is when enabling them. + +The following information is provided along with the description: + + Architectures: which instruction set architectures provide this ioctl. + x86 includes both i386 and x86_64. + + Parameters: what parameters are accepted by the capability. + + Returns: the return value. General error numbers (EBADF, ENOMEM, EINVAL) + are not detailed, but errors with specific meanings are. + +6.1 KVM_CAP_PPC_OSI + +Architectures: ppc +Parameters: none +Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error + +This capability enables interception of OSI hypercalls that otherwise would +be treated as normal system calls to be injected into the guest. OSI hypercalls +were invented by Mac-on-Linux to have a standardized communication mechanism +between the guest and the host. + +When this capability is enabled, KVM_EXIT_OSI can occur. + +6.2 KVM_CAP_PPC_PAPR + +Architectures: ppc +Parameters: none +Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error + +This capability enables interception of PAPR hypercalls. PAPR hypercalls are +done using the hypercall instruction "sc 1". + +It also sets the guest privilege level to "supervisor" mode. Usually the guest +runs in "hypervisor" privilege mode with a few missing features. + +In addition to the above, it changes the semantics of SDR1. In this mode, the +HTAB address part of SDR1 contains an HVA instead of a GPA, as PAPR keeps the +HTAB invisible to the guest. + +When this capability is enabled, KVM_EXIT_PAPR_HCALL can occur. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.c b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.c index d928c134dee6..c095d79cae73 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.c +++ b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.c @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ static unsigned long load_bzimage(int fd) /* * Go back to the start of the file and read the header. It should be - * a Linux boot header (see Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt) + * a Linux boot header (see Documentation/x86/boot.txt) */ lseek(fd, 0, SEEK_SET); read(fd, &boot, sizeof(boot)); diff --git a/Documentation/vm/00-INDEX b/Documentation/vm/00-INDEX index dca82d7c83d8..5481c8ba3412 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/vm/00-INDEX @@ -30,8 +30,6 @@ page_migration - description of page migration in NUMA systems. pagemap.txt - pagemap, from the userspace perspective -slabinfo.c - - source code for a tool to get reports about slabs. slub.txt - a short users guide for SLUB. unevictable-lru.txt diff --git a/Documentation/vm/numa b/Documentation/vm/numa index a200a386429d..ade01274212d 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/numa +++ b/Documentation/vm/numa @@ -109,11 +109,11 @@ to improve NUMA locality using various CPU affinity command line interfaces, such as taskset(1) and numactl(1), and program interfaces such as sched_setaffinity(2). Further, one can modify the kernel's default local allocation behavior using Linux NUMA memory policy. -[see Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.] +[see Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt.] System administrators can restrict the CPUs and nodes' memories that a non- privileged user can specify in the scheduling or NUMA commands and functions -using control groups and CPUsets. [see Documentation/cgroups/CPUsets.txt] +using control groups and CPUsets. [see Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt] On architectures that do not hide memoryless nodes, Linux will include only zones [nodes] with memory in the zonelists. This means that for a memoryless diff --git a/Documentation/vm/slub.txt b/Documentation/vm/slub.txt index 07375e73981a..f464f47bc60d 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/slub.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/slub.txt @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ data and perform operation on the slabs. By default slabinfo only lists slabs that have data in them. See "slabinfo -h" for more options when running the command. slabinfo can be compiled with -gcc -o slabinfo Documentation/vm/slabinfo.c +gcc -o slabinfo tools/slub/slabinfo.c Some of the modes of operation of slabinfo require that slub debugging be enabled on the command line. F.e. no tracking information will be diff --git a/Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt b/Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt index 7869f14d055c..bc7226ef5055 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt @@ -27,9 +27,6 @@ Some of these entries are: magically-generated functions that make their way to do_IRQ with the interrupt number as a parameter. - - emulate_vsyscall: int 0xcc, a special non-ABI entry used by - vsyscall emulation. - - APIC interrupts: Various special-purpose interrupts for things like TLB shootdown. diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist deleted file mode 100644 index 4c741d6bc048..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ -Chinese translated version of Documentation/SubmitChecklist - -If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the -original document maintainer directly. However, if you have a problem -communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for -help. Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated -or if there is a problem with the translation. - -Chinese maintainer: Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -Documentation/SubmitChecklist µÄÖÐÎÄ·Òë - -Èç¹ûÏëÆÀÂÛ»ò¸üб¾ÎĵÄÄÚÈÝ£¬ÇëÖ±½ÓÁªÏµÔÎĵµµÄά»¤Õß¡£Èç¹ûÄãʹÓÃÓ¢ÎÄ -½»Á÷ÓÐÀ§ÄѵĻ°£¬Ò²¿ÉÒÔÏòÖÐÎÄ°æά»¤ÕßÇóÖú¡£Èç¹û±¾·Òë¸üв»¼°Ê±»òÕß· -Òë´æÔÚÎÊÌ⣬ÇëÁªÏµÖÐÎÄ°æά»¤Õß¡£ - -ÖÐÎÄ°æά»¤Õߣº ¼ÖÍþÍþ Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> -ÖÐÎÄ°æ·ÒëÕߣº ¼ÖÍþÍþ Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> -ÖÐÎÄ°æУÒëÕߣº ¼ÖÍþÍþ Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> - - -ÒÔÏÂΪÕýÎÄ ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -LinuxÄÚºËÌá½»Çåµ¥ -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -ÕâÀïÓÐһЩÄں˿ª·¢ÕßÓ¦¸Ã×öµÄ»ù±¾ÊÂÇ飬Èç¹ûËûÃÇÏë¿´µ½×Ô¼ºµÄÄں˲¹¶¡Ìá½» -±»½ÓÊܵĸü¿ì¡£ - -ÕâЩ¶¼Êdz¬³öDocumentation/SubmittingPatchesÎĵµÀïËùÌṩµÄÒÔ¼°ÆäËû -¹ØÓÚÌá½»LinuxÄں˲¹¶¡µÄ˵Ã÷¡£ - -1£ºÈç¹ûÄãʹÓÃÁËÒ»¸ö¹¦ÄÜÄÇô¾Í#include¶¨Òå/ÉùÃ÷ÄǸö¹¦ÄܵÄÄǸöÎļþ¡£ - ²»ÒªÒÀ¿¿ÆäËû¼ä½ÓÒýÈ붨Òå/ÉùÃ÷ÄǸö¹¦ÄܵÄÍ·Îļþ¡£ - -2£º¹¹½¨¼ò½àÊÊÓûòÕ߸ü¸ÄCONFIGÑ¡Ïî =y£¬=m£¬»òÕß=n¡£ - ²»ÒªÓбàÒ뾯¸æ/´íÎó£¬ ²»ÒªÓÐÁ´½Ó¾¯¸æ/´íÎó¡£ - -2b£ºÍ¨¹ý allnoconfig, allmodconfig - -2c£ºµ±Ê¹Óà 0=builddir ³É¹¦µØ¹¹½¨ - -3£ºÍ¨¹ýʹÓñ¾µØ½»²æ±àÒ빤¾ß»òÕßÆäËûһЩ¹¹½¨²úËù£¬ÔÚ¶àCPU¿ò¼ÜÉϹ¹½¨¡£ - -4£ºppc64 ÊÇÒ»¸öºÜºÃµÄ¼ì²é½»²æ±àÒëµÄ¿ò¼Ü£¬ÒòΪËüÍùÍù°Ñ¡®unsigned long¡¯ - µ±64λֵÀ´Ê¹Óᣠ- -5£º°´ÕÕDocumentation/CodingStyleÎļþÀïµÄÏêϸÃèÊö£¬¼ì²éÄã²¹¶¡µÄÕûÌå·ç¸ñ¡£ - ʹÓò¹¶¡·ç¸ñ¼ì²éËöËéµÄÎ¥¹æ(scripts/checkpatch.pl)£¬ÉóºËÔ±ÓÅÏÈÌá½»¡£ - ÄãÓ¦¸Ãµ÷ÕûÒÅÁôÔÚÄã²¹¶¡ÖеÄËùÓÐÎ¥¹æ¡£ - -6£ºÈκθüлòÕ߸Ķ¯CONFIGÑ¡Ï²»ÄÜ´òÂÒÅäÖò˵¥¡£ - -7£ºËùÓеÄKconfigÑ¡Ïî¸üж¼ÒªÓÐ˵Ã÷ÎÄ×Ö¡£ - -8£ºÒѾÈÏÕæµØ×ܽáÁËÏà¹ØµÄKconfig×éºÏ¡£ÕâÊǺÜÄÑͨ¹ý²âÊÔ×öºÃµÄ--ÄÔÁ¦ÔÚÕâÀïϽµ¡£ - -9£º¼ì²é¾ßÓмò½àÐÔ¡£ - -10£ºÊ¹ÓÃ'make checkstack'ºÍ'make namespacecheck'¼ì²é£¬È»ºóÐÞ¸ÄËùÕÒµ½µÄÎÊÌâ¡£ - ×¢Ò⣺¶ÑÕ»¼ì²é²»»áÃ÷È·µØ³öÏÖÎÊÌ⣬µ«ÊÇÈκεÄÒ»¸öº¯ÊýÔÚ¶ÑÕ»ÉÏʹÓöàÓÚ512×Ö½Ú - ¶¼Òª×¼±¸Ð޸ġ£ - -11£º°üº¬kernel-docµ½È«¾ÖÄÚºËAPIsÎļþ¡££¨²»ÒªÇó¾²Ì¬µÄº¯Êý£¬µ«ÊÇ°üº¬Ò²ÎÞËùν¡££© - ʹÓÃ'make htmldocs'»òÕß'make mandocs'À´¼ì²ékernel-doc£¬È»ºóÐÞ¸ÄÈκΠ- ·¢ÏÖµÄÎÊÌâ¡£ - -12£ºÒѾͨ¹ýCONFIG_PREEMPT, CONFIG_DEBUG_PREEMPT, - CONFIG_DEBUG_SLAB, CONFIG_DEBUG_PAGEALLOC, CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES, - CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK, CONFIG_DEBUG_ATOMIC_SLEEP²âÊÔ£¬²¢ÇÒͬʱ¶¼ - ʹÄÜ¡£ - -13£ºÒѾ¶¼¹¹½¨²¢ÇÒʹÓûòÕß²»Ê¹Óà CONFIG_SMP ºÍ CONFIG_PREEMPT²âÊÔÖ´ÐÐʱ¼ä¡£ - -14£ºÈç¹û²¹¶¡Ó°ÏìIO/Disk£¬µÈµÈ£ºÒѾͨ¹ýʹÓûòÕß²»Ê¹Óà CONFIG_LBDAF ²âÊÔ¡£ - -15£ºËùÓеÄcodepathsÒѾÐÐʹËùÓÐlockdepÆôÓù¦ÄÜ¡£ - -16£ºËùÓеÄ/proc¼Ç¼¸üж¼Òª×÷³ÉÎļþ·ÅÔÚDocumentation/Ŀ¼Ï¡£ - -17£ºËùÓеÄÄÚºËÆô¶¯²ÎÊý¸üж¼±»¼Ç¼µ½Documentation/kernel-parameters.txtÎļþÖС£ - -18£ºËùÓеÄÄ£¿é²ÎÊý¸üж¼ÓÃMODULE_PARM_DESC()¼Ç¼¡£ - -19£ºËùÓеÄÓû§¿Õ¼ä½Ó¿Ú¸üж¼±»¼Ç¼µ½Documentation/ABI/¡£²é¿´Documentation/ABI/README - ¿ÉÒÔ»ñµÃ¸ü¶àµÄÐÅÏ¢¡£¸Ä±äÓû§¿Õ¼ä½Ó¿ÚµÄ²¹¶¡Ó¦¸Ã±»Óʼþ³Ë͸ølinux-api@vger.kernel.org¡£ - -20£º¼ì²éËüÊDz»ÊǶ¼Í¨¹ý`make headers_check'¡£ - -21£ºÒѾͨ¹ýÖÁÉÙÒýÈëslabºÍpage-allocationʧ°Ü¼ì²é¡£²é¿´Documentation/fault-injection/¡£ - -22£ºÐ¼ÓÈëµÄÔ´ÂëÒѾͨ¹ý`gcc -W'£¨Ê¹ÓÃ"make EXTRA_CFLAGS=-W"£©±àÒë¡£ÕâÑù½«²úÉúºÜ¶à·³ÄÕ£¬ - µ«ÊǶÔÓÚÑ°ÕÒ©¶´ºÜÓÐÒæ´¦£¬ÀýÈç:"warning: comparison between signed and unsigned"¡£ - -23£ºµ±Ëü±»ºÏ²¢µ½-mm²¹¶¡¼¯ºóÔÙ²âÊÔ£¬ÓÃÀ´È·¶¨ËüÊÇ·ñ»¹ºÍ²¹¶¡¶ÓÁÐÖеÄÆäËû²¹¶¡Ò»Æð¹¤×÷ÒÔ¼°ÔÚVM£¬VFS - ºÍÆäËû×ÓϵͳÖи÷¸ö±ä»¯¡£ - -24£ºËùÓеÄÄÚ´æÆÁÕÏ{e.g., barrier(), rmb(), wmb()}ÐèÒªÔÚÔ´´úÂëÖеÄÒ»¸ö×¢ÊÍÀ´½âÊÍËûÃǶ¼ÊǸÉʲôµÄ - ÒÔ¼°ÔÒò¡£ - -25£ºÈç¹ûÓÐÈκÎÊäÈëÊä³ö¿ØÖƵIJ¹¶¡±»Ìí¼Ó£¬Ò²Òª¸üÐÂDocumentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt¡£ - -26£ºÈç¹ûÄãµÄ¸ü¸Ä´úÂëÒÀ¿¿»òÕßʹÓÃÈκεÄÄÚºËAPIs»òÕßÓëÏÂÃæµÄkconfig·ûºÅÓйØϵµÄ¹¦ÄÜ£¬Äã¾ÍÒª - ʹÓÃÏà¹ØµÄkconfig·ûºÅ¹Ø±Õ£¬ and/or =m£¨Èç¹ûÑ¡ÏîÌṩ£©[ÔÚͬһʱ¼ä²»ÊÇËùÓõĶ¼ÆôÓ㬽ö½ö¸÷¸ö»òÕß×ÔÓÉ - ×éºÏËûÃÇ]£º - - CONFIG_SMP, CONFIG_SYSFS, CONFIG_PROC_FS, CONFIG_INPUT, CONFIG_PCI, - CONFIG_BLOCK, CONFIG_PM, CONFIG_HOTPLUG, CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ, - CONFIG_NET, CONFIG_INET=n (ºóÒ»¸öʹÓà CONFIG_NET=y) |